Woori Technology RV-5 AV RECEIVER User Manual RV5 Outside Front Cover

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	785230
Application ID	VvYexB9vPegtrCFM7EqROg==
Document Description	USERS MANUAL
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	208.9kB (2611253 bits)
Date Submitted	2007-04-26 00:00:00
Date Available	2007-04-26 00:00:00
Creation Date	2004-09-08 20:41:51
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2007-04-26 09:55:17
Document Title	RV5 Outside Front Cover.fm
Document Creator	FrameMaker 7.1
Document Author:	shazard

RV-5 Receiver
User Guide
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with a dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce
heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized
or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A
grounding-type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third
prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an
electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched, particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from
the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by
the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart, stand,
tripod, bracket or table specified
by the manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart is
used, use caution when moving
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock,
do not expose this apparatus to rain or
moisture.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury
from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such as when a power
supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,
the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture, does not operate normally, or has been
dropped.
Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or
splashing and ensure that no objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, are placed on the
apparatus.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the
AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord
plug from the AC receptacle.
The MAINS cord is intended to be the safety
disconnect device for this apparatus and shall
remain readily operable at all times.
Do not expose batteries to excessive heat, such
as sunshine, fire, or the like.
This product shall be connected to a MAINS
socket outlet with a protective earthing
connection.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and radiates radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on. The user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
•
•
•
•
Re-orient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
television technician for help.
Caution
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme
à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
Lexicon, Logic 7, and the L7 logo are registered trademarks of Harman International Industries, Inc.
DLP and Texas Instruments are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
DTS, DTS-ES, DTS Surround, and Neo:6 are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. and DTS 96/24 is a trademark of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Faroudja and DCDi by Faroudja are trademarks of Genesis Microchip, Inc.
Lexicon Inc.
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
Tel
781-280-0300
Fax
781-280-0490
www.harmanspecialtygroup.com
HD-DVD is a trademark of the DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation (DVD FLLC).
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
SACD is a trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc.
SHARC is a registered trademark of Analog Devices, Inc.
Customer Service
Telephone:
781-280-0300
Sales Fax:
781-280-0495
Service Fax:
781-280-0499
Other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.
© 2007 Harman International Industries, Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Part No. 070-18144 | Rev 0 | 1/07
This document should not be construed as a commitment on the part of Harman Specialty Group. The information it contains is
subject to change without notice. Harman Specialty Group assumes no responsibility for errors that may appear within this
document.
Introduction
Lexicon
DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS
This document contains general safety, installation and operation instructions for the RV-8 Receiver. It is important to read this user guide before
attempting to use the product. Pay particular attention to safety instructions.
The following symbols are used in the document:
Appears on the component to indicate the presence of uninsulated, dangerous voltage inside
the enclosure – voltage that may be sufficient to
constitute a risk of shock.
Appears on the component to indicate important operating and maintenance instructions in
the accompanying literature.
WARNING
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in injury or death.
CAUTION!
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, condition or the like that, if not correctly performed
or adhered to, could result in damage or
destruction to part or all of the product.
Note:
Calls attention to information that is essential to
highlight.
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
Represents a menu path. The menu items in gray boxes must be
selected with the remote control Menu  arrow to access the
menu or menu item in the black box. For example, the SETUP,
INPUTS, and DVD1 menu items must be selected to open the
DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu.
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is used here as an example and will
continue to be used as an example throughout this document.
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu may be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a
menu path, any other input may be substituted.
This document uses the term DTS(-ES) to indicate that DTS-ES encoding may or may not be present in the input source.
ii
1
Getting Started
About the RV-8........................................................................... 1-2
Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Product Registration ................................................................... 1-5
Installation Considerations.......................................................... 1-5
Remote Control Battery Installation ............................................ 1-6
Getting Started
Lexicon
ABOUT THE RV-5
Thank you for purchasing the RV-5 Receiver, an 8-channel audio
and video control center with independent zone monitoring that
provides control of audio and video source selection in three zones
at the same time. The RV-5 includes eight configurable inputs, each
of which can be assigned to its built-in tuner, eight digital audio,
eight analog audio, phono, five composite video, five S-Video or
three component video input connectors. The analog connectors
can be configured for up to two 5.1-channel sources.
The RV-5 features an integrated 7-channel power amplifier that is
designed to achieve high levels of power and performance.
Equipped with a toroidal power transformer, the amplifier also
provides thermal and DC protection.
The RV-5 AM/FM stereo radio tuner features four tuning regions,
allows for the automatic or manual storing of up to 40 preset
stations, can receive elements of the Radio Data System (RDS)
broadcasts, and is fully configurable for ease of operation. The RV-5
also includes a phono input.
Inside and out, the RV-5 is designed for possible future developments. The rear panel houses one RS-232 connector capable of
performing configuration downloads and flash memory software
upgrades, and another capable of supporting future developments.
The rear panel also includes one removable access panel to accommodate connectors for emerging technologies.
More than just an audio and video control center, the RV-5 features
the latest version of Lexicon’s critically acclaimed Logic 7 ®
decoding, which creates 7.1-channel output from stereo, and
5.1-and 6.1-channel sources. Unlike other decoders, Logic 7 is
compatible with all input sources and requires no special encoding.
Because the improvement it provides is clearly audible, Logic 7
1-2
decoding is widely regarded as the finest available. A Logic
7-encoded downmix of multichannel source material is available
when using the Headphone listening mode. If a stereo source is
present, the HEADPHONE L7 listening mode processes it using
LOGIC7, then uses Head Related Transfer Functions to create a
headphone output that introduces a subtle sense of surround
sound, while preserving the original stereo image.
In addition to Logic 7, the RV-5 offers Dolby Digital Surround EX,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Pro Logic, DTS 96/24, DTS neo:6, and
DTS-ES.
The RV-5 is one of the most advanced audio and video control
centers available. High-precision 24-bit/96kHz A/D converters can
be used to convert stereo analog audio input signals to digital
signals, allowing the RV-5 to provide the benefits of precise digital
signal processing without sacrificing signal integrity. 24-bit/192kHZ
D/A converters are available for all output channels. Alternatively,
5.1-channel and stereo analog signals can bypass A/D conversion
and internal processing, following a pure signal path directly to the
output connectors.
Digital audio input signals are processed through a two-stage phase
lock loop for extremely low intrinsic jitter and high rejection.
Lexicon’s proprietary auto azimuth technology corrects timing and
level imbalances in stereo sources, ensuring exceptionally accurate
playback of surround-encoded sources. A digital audio passthrough output is available for recording digital signals with a CD
recorder or a similar component.
Complementing its audio performance, the RV-5 features
broadcast-quality video switchers. An ultrawide-bandwidth
component video switcher accepts analog component or RGB
video signals, while a composite and S-Video switcher accepts high-
RV-5
quality NTSC, PAL or SECAM video signals. Composite and S-Video
sources can be converted to 480i NTSC (576i PAL) component
video. The component video switcher can pass high-definition TV
(HDTV) signals and standard-definition (SD) TV signals. Both
switchers are designed to pass video signals without alteration or
degradation.
Built to professional standards, the RV-5 is designed to serve as the
control center in any high-quality home theater. Even the most
demanding enthusiast will be impressed with its unique combination of power, performance, flexibility and technological
sophistication. With extensive expansion capabilities, the RV-5
represents a solid investment that will retain its value in the face of
rapidly emerging technologies.
Based on the decoding platform of the Lexicon processor line, the
RV-8 Receiver is an exceptional addition to any home theater
system. AM/FM tuner, powerful amplifier, three independent
zones, impressive digital processor – the RV-8 is truly two separate
products seamlessly integrated into an incredibly flexible, highperformance, and sophisticated amplifier/processor system.
The RV-8 has enough raw power available to drive a 7-channel
system with room to spare thanks to a prodigious 140 watts per
channel. Even more impressive, it is capable of driving, difficult
speaker loads while retaining exceptional transparency, wide
dynamic range, and sonic neutrality.
Flexibility is a necessity in today’s home theater and the RV-8
delivers. The RV-8 can process all major formats from Dolby and
DTS, and features THX Ultra2 enhancements. These formats are
programmed into the RV-8 software as selectable preferred listening
Getting Started
modes. The listener can also program the RV-8 to a specific
listening mode by the input source selected, making favorite
settings simple and automatic. The AM/FM tuner also features the
Radio Data Systems (RDS) information, where available.
The RV-8 features Lexicon’s LOGIC 7 decoding. This technology is
based on decades of scientific research into how we hear and the
study of room acoustics. Lexicon Logic 7 processing intelligently
derives up to 7 channels from any 2-channel, 5.1-channel, or 6.1channel input source. LIVE, a unique system that transforms any
listening room into an ideal acoustic space, is also utilized in the RV8 receiver.
The RV-8 also features Bass Enhancement, another Lexicon proprietary technology developed specifically for surround systems.
During a live musical performance, bass envelops the listener;
however, when listening to the same performance from recorded
media in your home theater, the bass has more of an “in your head”
quality, instead of surrounding you. This phenomenon results from
low frequency sound waves and their interaction with the natural
acoustics of the room. The Lexicon Bass Enhancement system is
designed to reproduce the sense of bass envelopment that exists
during live performances.
Highly flexible, the RV-8 has three separate audio zones. Since all
three zones are wholly independent, it’s possible to watch a DVD in
the home theater while listening to a CD in the office and watching
satellite TV in the kitchen. These additional zones can be controlled
by IR or RS-232 based control systems.
With enormous flexibility, a powerful amplifier, superior processing,
and phenomenal sound quality, the RV-8 is truly in a class of its own
and would make a fine addition to any home theater. Contact your
local authorized Lexicon dealer to transform your listening
experience today.
1-3
Getting Started
Lexicon
HIGHLIGHTS
•
Eight channels
•
Eight configurable inputs
•
Three independent zones
•
Integrated 7-channel amplifier with
thermal and DC protection and toroidal
power transformer
•
Compatible with 2Ω speaker
impedances
•
Four S/PDIF coaxial and four S/PDIF
optical (Toslink) digital audio input
connectors
•
One S/PDIF coaxial and one S/PDIF
optical (Toslink) digital audio output
connectors
•
DTS 96/24, DTS NEO:6, and DTS-ES
(discrete and matrix) decoding
•
RS-232 control
•
Two trigger output connectors
•
Rear-panel IR input connector
•
24-Bit/192kHz D/A converters for all
audio channels
•
Two microphone input connectors
•
Two internal expansion slots
•
Two sets of analog A/V Zone 2 outputs;
one fixed, one variable
•
Removable access panel
•
AM/FM stereo radio tuner
•
RDS
•
Broadcast-quality video switching
•
Flash memory software upgrade
capabilities
•
Phono input with 2-channel analog
bypass path
•
Video up conversion from S-video/
composite to component video
•
Optional 19-inch rack-mount kit
•
Up to two 5.1-channel analog audio input
connectors
•
Automatic and manual calibration of
speaker distances and output levels
•
IR preprogrammed/learning remote
control with LCD display
•
Analog bypass option for 5.1 analog
stereo audio input connectors
•
Three component video input
connectors with full HDTV compatibility
•
Maximum volume level
•
Auto switching between digital and
analog audio input connectors
•
Five composite video input connectors
•
Five S-Video input connectors
•
Headphone output with LOGIC7
processing
•
One component video output
•
Two 32-bit DSP engines for custom
processing
•
Logic 7 decoding
•
Two 32-bit DSP engines
•
Separate DSP engine for decoding
compressed audio sources
1-4
•
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Pro
Logic IIx, and Dolby Pro Logic decoding
Getting Started
RV-5
PRODUCT REGISTRATION
Please register the RV-5 Receiver within 15 days of purchase.
Register online at www.lexicon.com or complete and return the
product registration card attached to the back cover of this user
guide. Retain the sales receipt as proof of warranty coverage.
INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
The RV-5 requires special care during installation to ensure optimal
performance. Pay particular attention to instructions below and to
other precautions that appear throughout this user guide.
DO install the RV-5 on a solid, flat, level surface such as a table or
shelf. The RV-5 can also be installed in a standard 19-inch
equipment rack using an optional rack-mount kit available from an
authorized Lexicon dealer.
DO NOT place the RV-5 on a windowsill or any location exposed to
direct sunlight.
DO NOT obstruct the front-panel IR receiver window. The remote
control must be in line of sight with the IR receiver for proper
operation.
DO NOT install the RV-5 on a surface that is unstable or unable to
support all four feet.
CAUTION!
Before moving the RV-5, power the unit off using the rearpanel power switch and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet.
DO select a dry, well-ventilated location out of direct sunlight.
DO NOT expose the RV-5 to high temperatures, humidity, steam,
smoke, dampness or excessive dust. Avoid installing the RV-5 near
radiators or stacking the RV-5 over other heat-producing
equipment such as a power amplifier.
DO NOT install the RV-5 near unshielded TV or FM antennas, cable
TV decoders, or other RF-emitting devices that might cause
interference.
DO NOT place the RV-5 on a thick rug or carpet, or cover the RV-8
with a cloth, as this might prevent proper cooling.
1-5
Getting Started
Lexicon
REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY INSTALLATION
The remote control requires four AAA batteries. The batteries should be replaced as needed. Alkaline batteries, which last longer without
leaking, are recommended. When battery power is low, the remote control enters a low-voltage condition, preventing it from operating the
RV-5. When this occurs, replace the batteries. Normal operation will resume when new batteries are installed.
To replace the remote control batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote control. Press the tab (1) and lift the cover (2) away from the remote control.
2. Remove old batteries (if applicable).
3. Observing the proper polarity, insert four AAA batteries (3).
4. Align the cover over the battery compartment and gently press down until it snaps back into place (4).
5. Dispose of the old batteries (if applicable).
1-6
2
Basic Operation
Front-Panel Overview ................................................................. 2-2
Rear-Panel Overview ................................................................... 2-6
Tuner Overview ........................................................................ 2-10
Selecting a Station...................................................................................2-10
Direct Station Access ...............................................................................2-10
Tune/Seek Access ....................................................................................2-10
Scan Mode ..............................................................................................2-11
Loading Presets .......................................................................................2-11
Saving Presets..........................................................................................2-11
Editing Presets .........................................................................................2-12
Autoload .................................................................................................2-12
Amplifier Overview ................................................................... 2-12
Amplifier Channel Status .........................................................................2-13
Making Connections With the Amplifier Output ......................................2-13
Headphone Overview ............................................................... 2-13
Remote Control Overview......................................................... 2-14
Operation Considerations ........................................................................2-14
MAIN Menu ............................................................................................2-14
Menu Navigation ....................................................................................2-14
Menu Item Selection ...............................................................................2-15
Remote Control Buttons ..........................................................................2-17
Command Matrix ....................................................................................2-18
Understanding the Zones ......................................................... 2-28
Two-Line Status ........................................................................ 2-28
STATUS Menus ......................................................................... 2-29
STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions.....................................................2-34
STATUS Menu Level Meters ...................................................... 2-35
Basic Operation
Lexicon
FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW
The RV-5 is shown below. The numbers in the front-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.
11
10
1. Front Panel Display
7. Zone 2 Off Button
2. IR Receiver
8. Main Zone Off Button
3. Volume Knob
9. Mute Button
4. Tuner
10. Mode
5. Main Zone Input Selection Buttons
11. Standby Button
6. Zone 2 Input Selection Buttons
2-2
and
Buttons
Basic Operation
RV-5
1 FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY
To adjust the Main Zone volume level:
Use the front-panel display to view the current input, listening
mode, input source and volume level. If the built-in tuner is active,
the display will show the frequency, band, listening mode and
volume level. The 2 x 20 character display also functions as a display
for messages and menus, one line at a time.
Rotate the volume knob clockwise to increase VOLUME
-34db
or counterclockwise to decrease volume level
in 1dB increments. A horizontal bar graph
indicating the current Main Zone volume level is displayed in the
on-screen and front-panel displays. The Main Zone volume range is
–80 to +12dB.
Note:
Power is still supplied to the RV-5 when standby mode is activated.
2 IR RECEIVER
The IR receiver receives infrared commands from the RV-5 remote
control. There are three associated LEDs.
•
The amber LED blinks when a remote control command is
received.
•
The red LED lights when the A/D converters are overloading.
•
The blue LED lights when the RV-5 is powered on and activated
– even if the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is
set to ALWAYS OFF.
To adjust the Zone 2 volume level:
1. Press and hold the front-panel Zone 2 input selection button that
corresponds with the current input source. For instance, if the
current input source is using the DVD1 input, press and hold the
DVD1 input selection button in the desired zone.
2. While holding the desired zone input ZONE 2 VOLUME -34db
selection button, rotate the volume knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease volume level in 1dB increments. ZONE 3 VOLUME -34db
The corresponding horizontal graph
appears in the on-screen and front-panel
displays, and indicates the position at which the current Zone 2
volume level falls within the –80 to +12dB volume range.
3. Release the selected Zone 2 input selection button when Zone 2
volume level has been set.
Red LED
Blue LED
Amber LED
3 VOLUME KNOB
4 TUNER SELECTION BUTTONS
Tuner selection buttons allow for direct entry of station frequencies,
selection of AM or FM broadcast bands and the saving/recalling of
presets. See “Tuner Overview” on page 2-9 for additional
information.
Use the volume knob to adjust volume level in all Zones.
2-3
Basic Operation
FRONT-PANEL OVERVIEW
Lexicon
(continued)
5 MAIN ZONE INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS
8 MODE
and
BUTTONS
Selects the corresponding input in the Main Zone. When an input is
selected, a blue LED lights on the corresponding input selection
button. When the Main Zone is deactivated, pressing a Main Zone
input selection button activates the corresponding input in the
Main Zone. Zone 2 remains deactivated until a Zone 2 input is
selected.
Use the Mode buttons to scroll to the previous ( ) or next ( )
available listening mode. Scrolling occurs in the order shown in the
MODE ADJUST menu. Refer to “Listening Mode Activation” on
page 6-2 for more information.
9 MUTE BUTTON
6 ZONE 2 INPUT SELECTION BUTTONS
Selects the corresponding input in Zone 2. When an input is
selected, an amber LED lights on the corresponding input selection
button. When Zone 2 is deactivated, pressing a Zone 2 input
selection button activates the corresponding input in Zone 2. The
Main Zone remains deactivated until a Main Zone input is selected.
7 STANDBY BUTTON
Toggles the RV-5 between on and standby. When the RV-5 is
powered on, pressing this button places the RV-5 into standby and
lights the red LED on the button. Power is supplied to the RV-5
when in standby. When the RV-5 is in standby, pressing the button
turns the unit on and activates all zones that were active in the
previous operating session.
In the event of a power outage, the RV-5 will display a BROWN
OUT!! PRESS STANDBY message. To turn the unit on, use the
S TA N D B Y b u t t o n . F o r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e “ P O W E R
MANAGEMENT” on page 3-3.
2-4
Mutes or restores the RV-5 Main Zone volume to its original level. Press
the Mute button to mute volume level; “MUTE ON” appears in the
on-screen and front-panel displays. Press the Mute button again to
restore the volume to its original level. The VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
and MUTE LEVEL parameter can be used to set mute levels.
Mute may be activated automatically or manually. For example, the
RV-5 briefly activates mute when changing input sources or
listening modes. The amber Mute button LED lights whenever
mute is activated.
10 MAIN ZONE OFF BUTTON
Deactivates the Main Zone.
11 ZONE 2 OFF BUTTON
Deactivates Zone 2.
Basic Operation
Lexicon
REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW
The RV-5 rear panel is shown below. The numbers in the rear-panel illustrations correspond with the numbered items in the text.
19
18
17
16
15
11
10
14
13
12
1. Microphone Input Connectors
8. Video Input Connectors
15. IR In Connector
2. Analog Audio Input Connectors
9. Main Zone Video Ouput Connectors
16. Dock Connector
3. Main Zone Audio Output Connectors
10. Component Video Input Connectors
17. Zone 2 Digital Audio Output Connectors
4. Digital Input Connectors
11. HDMI Input Connectors
18. Preamplifier Outputs
5. USB Connector Port
12. Power Switch
19. Tuner Antenna Connectors
6. Trigger Output Connectors
13. AC Input Connector
7. RS-232 Connector
14. Amplifier Outputs
2-5
Basic Operation
REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW
Lexicon
(continued)
CAUTION! Never make or break connections to the RV-5
unless the RV-5 and all associated components are
powered off.
1 MICROPHONE INPUT CONNECTOR
5 USB CONNECTOR PORT
Provides a USB port to connect to a compatible computer running
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, or higher with the latest service
packs installed to listen to audio from the computer through the RV5. The USB connector port is a “Mini B” connector and can also be
used to connect a compatible computer to the RV-5 for firmware
upgrades, when available. See page xxxx for more information on
playback of computer audio.
Provides a microphone input for speaker calibration.
6 TRIGGER OUTPUT CONNECTORS
2 ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provides analog audio inputs. Eight connectors labeled Front L/R,
Center, LFE, Side L/R and Rear L/R are available.
3 MAIN ZONE AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provides analog audio outputs in the Main Zone. Six stereo analog
audio input connectors labeled 1 to 6 are available.
Provide 12V DC output to control connected components. Two
trigger output connectors are available on a removable terminal
block. The PWR connector (the power trigger output connector) is
not configurable. It is activated when the RV-5 is powered on, and
deactivated when the RV-5 is powered off from the rear panel or by
putting the RV-5 into standby. The trigger output connector
(labeled 1) can be configured for remote or program operation. See
“Trigger Setup” on page 3-70 for more information.
7 RS-232 CONNECTOR
4 DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provides digital audio input in the Main Zone. Four S/PDIF coaxial
and four S/PDIF optical (Toslink) input connectors are available.
Connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz),
Dolby Digital, and DTS(-ES) sources. Connectors are not compatible
with MPEG (MP3) sources.
The RS-232 serial connector provides serial control and is used to
perform configuration downloads and flash memory software
upgrades.
8 VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provides the Main Zone video inputs. Four composite video
connectors labeled 1 to 4 and four S-Video connectors labeled 1 to
4 are available.
2-6
Basic Operation
RV-5
9 MAIN ZONE VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
13 AC INPUT CONNECTOR
Provides the Main Zone video outputs. One composite video
connector, one S-Video connector, one component video
connector, and one HDMI video connector are available.
Provides power to the RV-5 through the supplied power cord.
14 AMPLIFIER OUTPUTS
Provides inputs that can be used with any source device that is
equipped with analog Y/Pr/Pb or RGB component video outputs.
Three inputs, labeled Component Video 1 to 3, are supplied.
Provide audio outputs to the speakers. Channels are labeled for
Front, Center, and Rear speakers to facilitate surround system setup.
Normally, the REAR Left & RIGHT speakers are used in the Main
Zone for 7.1 surround sound systems, but they can also be used as
the left and right outputs for Zone 2.
11 HDMI INPUT CONNECTORS
The amplifier binding posts accommodate the following
connectors:
10 COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
Provides two HDMI inputs for devices such as DVD player or HDTV
tuner.
•
standard 0.75-inch banana plugs
•
size 10-12 gauge spade connectors
•
up to 10-gauge bare wire
12 POWER SWITCH
Use the Power switch to connect or disconnect power from the AC
Input connector to the RV-5. The I and O positions represent “on”
and “off” status, respectively. When the RV-5 is powered on, the
front-panel Standby button or remote control On button can be
used to activate and deactivate standby mode. When the RV-5 is
powered off, standby mode is not available.
See the next page for additional amplifier information.
15 IR IN CONNECTOR
Accepts input of IR signals from infrared distribution equipment.
One 3.5mm jack that accepts a stereo plug (Tip/Ring/Sleeve
connection) or mono plug (Tip/Sleeve connection) is available.
In the event of a power outage, the RV-5 will display a BROWNOUT,
CYCLE POWER message. To turn the unit back on, use the rearpanel power switch. In this instance, the front-panel StandBy switch
has no effect.
2-7
Basic Operation
REAR-PANEL OVERVIEW
Lexicon
(continued)
16 DOCK CONNECTOR
Provides an input port for an iPod®, which can then be accessed
through the RV-5. To use this feature, the D-1 Dock option must be
installed to the DOCK connector. With a compatible iPod
connected to the RV-5, selecting the DOCK input allows you to play
audio programming from the iPod. You can navigate the iPod
using the RV-5 remote and view any of the iPod menus through the
RV-5 front panel and any video monitor connected to the RV-5.
For more information on the D-1 Dock option and how to use your
RV-5 with an iPod, refer to page xxx.
17 ZONE 2 DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT CONNECTORS
Provides digital audio output in Zone 2. Two outputs are available,
marked LEFT and RIGHT.
18 PREAMPLIFIER OUTPUTS
Provides outputs for an optional, external power amplifier for applications where higher power is desired.
19 TUNER ANTENNA CONNECTORS
Provides two antenna connections for the AM/FM stereo radio
tuner.
AMPLIFIER OVERVIEW
The RV-5 features a 9-channel power amplifier with 140W per
channel. Heavy duty gold plated 5-way binding posts are provided
for speaker connections.
The amplifiers feature advanced thermal current and DC protection
for each channel. Thermal protection monitors the temperature of
the chassis and heatsinks and automatically deactivates the specific
channel(s) when they exceed their normal safe operating temperature. Current protection ensures that the output transistors are
protected by limiting the current capability which is determined by
the output voltage, while DC protection prevents DC and
frequencies below 10Hz from reaching the speakers.
The amplifiers are designed to meet the highest standards of performance and sound quality.
MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH THE AMPLIFIER
OUTPUT
The amplifier output connectors can accept bare speaker wires,
banana plug connectors or certain spade connectors. When using
bare speaker wires, loosen the connector, insert the wire into the
top of the receptacle, then tighten the connector. The same
procedure should be used for spade connectors. Banana plugs
should be inserted into the outward-facing receptacle.
Use heavy-gauge speaker cable to ensure low-impedance
connections between the amplifier and the speakers. Observe
correct speaker polarity.
CAUTION! Do not connect the outputs of one channel to
the outputs of other channels or to other amplifiers.
2-8
Basic Operation
RV-5
TUNER OVERVIEW
The RV-5 features an AM/FM stereo radio tuner. The front panel
displays the currently selected frequency, band, listening mode and
volume. Forty presets can store AM or FM frequencies, identified by
the preset number/name and station frequency/band. For example:
WABC/90.90 FM or Preset 02/10.30 AM. Two antennas are
supplied with the RV-5: one for AM and one for FM stereo. At a
minimum, use of the supplied antennas is recommended to ensure
consistent tuner performance.
The tuner can be setup to receive elements of the Radio Data
System (RDS) broadcasts. Originated in Europe and now with
limited availability in the US, the RDS is a standard for broadcasting
digital data along with an FM radio broadcast. When the RDS
option is active and RDS data is received, the RV-5 tuner displays
the identity of the broadcast station, receipt of alternate station
frequencies and any additional text (referred to as RT or Radio Text)
that the station broadcasts. For more information on RDS features,
see “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72.
DIRECT STATION ACCESS
To access a specific frequency, use the numeric buttons on either the
front panel or remote control to enter the desired station frequency.
To directly access a station from the front panel or remote control:
1. Press the AM/FM button to select the desired band.
2. Enter the three or four digit station frequency. For example, to
load FM station 90.9, press 9-0-9. To load AM station 1030, press
the AM/FM button to select the AM band, then press 1-0-3-0.
Note:
When digits are first entered, a “Loading Preset” status message appears
in the front-panel (and on-screen) display. When a third digit is entered,
the RV-5 senses a frequency is being entered and changes the status
message to “Setting Frequency.”
TUNE/SEEK ACCESS
SELECTING A STATION
Begin selecting a radio station by activating the built-in tuner input.
To activate the tuner input, press the front-panel TUNER button or
select the TUNER option from the remote-control MAIN screen. See
the “Tuner Setup” on page 3-72 for more information.
Next, determine if the desired frequency band is active by pushing the
front-panel or remote-control AM/FM button to toggle between the
AM and FM frequency bands.
Once the frequency band is set, there are several ways to select a radio
station: direct station access, tune/seek access, scan mode and presets.
Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel ( / ) or
remote control (
) to navigate to the next available
frequency. For example, if the currently loaded frequency is
101.7FM, press the Tune/Seek
button to load 101.9FM. Press the
Tune/Seek button again to load 102.1FM, and so on.
Press one of the Tune/Seek buttons on the front panel ( / ) or
remote control (
) for 2 seconds to activate seek mode.
Seek mode searches for the next available radio station. If the tuner
is having difficulty locating stations, raise the sensitivity level. See
“SCAN SENS” on 3-73 for more information.
2-9
Basic Operation
TUNER OVERVIEW
Lexicon
Note:
(continued)
This feature is only accessible via the remote control.
SCAN MODE
Scan Mode scans through all available stations, pausing for two
seconds on each station before scanning to the next one.
To enter Scan Mode:
Press and hold the front-panel ( / ) or remote-control (
Tune/Seek buttons until SCAN or SCAN is displayed.
To stop scanning:
Press either Tune/Seek button.
LOADING PRESETS
To load a preset:
Enter a preset (number between 1 and 40) using the front-panel or
remote-control number buttons.
A “Loading Preset” status message appears in the front-panel (and
on-screen) display. If a third digit is entered, the tuner switches over
to Direct Station Access mode and the front-panel status message
changes to “Setting Frequency.”
SAVING PRESETS
The RV-5 has 40 presets available for storing AM or FM stations. The
presets are divided into four banks with ten presets per bank. It is
possible to store a combination of AM and FM stations in each
bank. Storing presets on the RV-5 can be accomplished from either
the front panel or the remote control. The operation is identical.
To save a station as a preset on the RV-5:
1. Press the front-panel or remote-control SAVE button. A status
message displaying ”Saving Preset” appears in the front-panel
(and on-screen) display.
2. Enter a number between 1 and 40 to save the currently loaded
frequency as the corresponding preset.
For example, if the tuner is currently playing 101.7FM, press
the SAVE button, then the 1 button to save 101.7FM as preset
number 1.
Press the 1 button followed by the 5 button to save as preset
number 15. Pressing more than two numbers resets the preset
number to the third digit entered.
Pressing the SAVE button a second time cancels the saving process.
To skip through available presets in order:
Press the remote-control
or
button. For example, if preset 1 is
loaded and the
button is pressed, the RV-5 will load preset 2 (or
the next available preset). If preset 1 is loaded and the
button is
pressed, the RV-5 will load preset 40 (or the next available preset).
2-10
NAMING PRESETS
Preset stations use a naming system based on the RDS system. In the
US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call letters, or what
the broadcast information identifies as the call letters. In Europe and
Japan, each preset channel is identified by the station's Program
Basic Operation
RV-5
Service (PS) name.
If the RDS information is not available, the preset name defaults to
PresetXX, where XX is the listed number position in the Preset menu.
For example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,
then the name for that position is WABC. If Preset #23 does not
broadcast their call letters, then that location is identified as Preset23 in
the menu.
See “Tuner Presets” on page 5-2 for additional information.
AUTOLOAD
The RV-5 can automatically scan and store presets. This can be
accomplished only from the remote control. See “Tuner Setup
(continued)” on page 3-74 for additional information.
To start autoloading:
EDITING PRESETS
It is possible to customize the name of each preset on the RV-5.
1. Select AUTOLOAD from the MAIN MENU : SETUP : TUNER SETUP
menu.
2. Press menu
to start AUTOLOAD.
To edit the preset name:
1. Select TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU. The TUNER
PRESETS menu contains a list of preset pages. PAGE 1 contains
presets 1 through 10, PAGE 2 contains presets 11 through 20, etc.
2. Select the page containing the desired preset.
A list of presets appears.
3. Select the desired preset.
The EDIT PRESET menu opens and displays the preset call letters
(or PS), frequency, and band.
The EDIT PRESET menu options are as follows:
•
Select LISTEN TO PRESET to load the preset frequency.
•
Select NAME to customize the preset name. The preset name
can be up to eight characters long.
•
Select CLEAR PRESET to clear the frequency and band information from the preset.
2-11
Basic Operation
REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW
The RV-5 remote control provides full operation of the RV-5,
including commands, such as menu navigation, that are not
available from the front panel. It is also designed to provide control
for the entire home theater system. This section provides a brief
over vie w of t he remote contro l. For detailed operation/
programming instructions and manufacturing codes, refer to
Appendix C.
OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS
The following factors can improve or impede remote control
operation.
Note the following before operating the RV-5 remote control:
•
The remote control must be in line-of-sight with the front-panel
IR receiver. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control
and the IR receiver. The remote control may become unreliable
if strong sunlight or fluorescent light shines on the IR receiver.
•
For optimal performance, position the remote control at a
30-degree angle no more than 40 to 60 feet (12.2m to 18.3m)
from the RV-5. Placing the RV-5 inside a smoked glass cabinet
will reduce the remote control range.
•
Remote controls for different components can interfere with
one another. Avoid using remote controls for different components at the same time.
•
Remote-control batteries should be replaced as needed.
2-12
Lexicon
Basic Operation
RV-5
Note:
The DVD1 device has been preprogrammed to control the Lexicon RT-10
and RT-20 disc players.
MAIN MENU
Use the MAIN MENU to open the four main
menu branches: MODE ADJUST, AUDIO
CONTROLS, TUNER PRESETS and SETUP.
MAIN MENU
MENU ITEM SELECTION
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
Use the remote-control Menu arrows to navigate menus and to
select menu items.
MENU NAVIGATION
To select a menu item on the open menu:
Use the remote-control arrow buttons to navigate the extensive
menu structure starting on page B-2. The table below indicates the
navigation commands that the remote-control buttons perform
when the Main Zone command bank is activated.
1. Press the remote-control
menu item.
Arrow
and
arrows to highlight the desired
2. When the desired menu item is highlighted, press the Menu
Navigation Functions
• When a menu is open, press the remote-control Menu
• When no menus are open, press the Menu
arrow to select the highlighted menu item.
arrow to open the MAIN MENU.
• When a menu is open, press the Menu
arrow to close the menu and, in most cases, open the previous menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When
the MAIN MENU is closed, the menu structure is also closed.
• When no menus are open, pressing the Menu
• When a drop-down menu is open, press the Menu
arrow button performs no function.
arrow to select the current setting and close the drop-down menu.
• When a menu is open, press the Menu
and
arrow buttons to scroll upward and downward through the complete list
of menu items. The highlighted menu item appears in the front-panel display. All menu items appear in the on-screen
display. A scroll bar appears in the left side of the on-screen display when menu items exceed the on-screen display’s top
and bottom margins. The cursor automatically wraps to the next menu item when the first or last menu item is passed.
2-13
Basic Operation
Lexicon
MENU OPTIONS
Selecting a menu option opens another menu within the menu
structure. For example, selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens
the SETUP menu.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
D I S P L AY S
V O L U ME C O N T R O L S
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
L O C K O PT I O N S
L I V E ! C A L I B R AT I O N
P O W E R M A N A G E ME N T
2. When the desired setting appears beneath the parameter
name, press the
arrow to accept the setting and close the
drop-down menu.
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPHS
Selecting some menu parameters opens a horizontal bar graph. The
bar graph indicates the position at which the current parameter setting
falls within the entire parameter range.
For example, selecting the A/V SYNC DELAY parameter from the
DISPLAY SETUP menu opens the horizontal bar graph shown below,
which is used to adjust the amount of audio delay.
D I S P L AY S E T U P
OFF, 1 to 60ms
O N - S C R E E N D I S P L AY
F R O N T PA N E L D I S P L AY
A / V AS /YVN CS YDNE CL AY
D E L AY O F F O F F
C U S CT UOSMT ONMA M
EME
OFF OFF
NA
PARAMETER DROP-DOWN MENUS
Selecting some menu options opens a drop-down menu that contains
a list of available parameter settings. For example, selecting the
CUSTOM NAME parameter from the DISPLAY SETUP menu opens a
drop-down menu which is used to select the ON or OFF setting.
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
To adjust a parameter setting with a horizontal bar graph:
D I S P L AY S E T U P
O N - S C R E E N D I S P L AY
F R O N T PA N E L D I S P L AY
A / V S Y N C D E L AY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
ON
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
To select a setting in a parameter drop-down menu:
1. When the drop-down menu opens, press the remote-control
and
arrows to scroll upward and downward through the
complete list of available settings. The current setting is displayed
beneath the parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel
displays.
2-14
1. When the horizontal bar graph appears, press the remote-control
and
arrows to increase or decrease the setting in the designated increments. The setting appears to the right of the
parameter name in the on-screen and front-panel displays.
2. When the desired adjustments have been made, press the
arrow to select the setting and close the horizontal bar graph.
Note:
Menu item selection instructions differ for certain menus. These instances
are noted throughout this user guide.
Basic Operation
RV-5
COMMAND MATRIX
The command matrix describes the commands that the remote
control buttons perform when each command bank is active.
BUTTON
HOME
MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1
Enters RV-5 standby mode.
ZONE2 PAGE2
Activates the RV-5.
Displays the MAIN Zone Displays the
command bank, which Main Zone
includes commands
Status.
that control the Main
Zone.
Selects the Dolby
Digital listening
mode family.
Displays the Zone 2 Toggles RV8 between
Status.
5 speaker and 7
speaker modes.
Displays the Zone 2
Deactivates the
command bank, which Main Zone.
includes commands that
control Zone 2.
Selects the DTS
listening mode
family.
Deactivates Zone 2. Adjusts the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
Main Zone BALANCE
to the left.
Displays the Zone 3
Selects the Tuner
command bank, which input for the
includes commands that Main Zone.
control Zone 3.
Selects the THX
listening mode
family.
Selects the Tuner
input for Zone 2.
Sets the Main Zone
Volume level to
-15dB.
Displays the DVD1
Selects the
command bank, which DVD1 input for
includes commands that the Main Zone.
control DVD1.
Toggles between
the current
listening mode
and the 2CHANNEL
listening mode.
Selects the DVD1
input for Zone 2.
Shows status menu
for current Main Zone
input stream.
Analog Bypass
Toggle.
Selects the DVD1
input for Zone 2.
Displays the DVD2
Selects the
command bank, which DVD2 input for
includes commands that the Main Zone.
control DVD2.
STAT2 button: see
page 2-28 for more
information.
Activates the RV-5.
2-15
Basic Operation
Lexicon
BUTTON
2-16
HOME
MAIN PAGE1 MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1
Displays the SAT
Selects the SAT
command bank, which
input for the
includes commands that Main Zone.
control the Satellite box.
Selects the L7 FILM
listening mode.
Selects the
Satellite input for
Zone 2.
ZONE2 PAGE2
Reserved for future
expansion.
Basic Operation
RV-5
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS
1. SYSTEM POWER OFF
2. Displays the name of the selected device.
3. POWER ON
4. Device and function buttons
11
5. Light
6. Displays page number/currently selected device
7. LCD page change
8. FAVORITE
9. HOME menu
10. CHANNEL/Listening Mode (+/-)
10
12
11. Previous channel
12. VOLUME (+/-)
13
14
13. MUTE
14. TRANSPORT functions (PLAY, STOP, REWIND, PAUSE, REC, SKIP and FF)
for VCR, DVD and CD
15
15. JOYSTICK (left, right, up, down and center press)
16. DISPLAY/AM/FM
17. ENTER/SAVE
16
18. MACRO buttons
17
18
2-17
Basic Operation
Lexicon
HOME
Selects the VCR
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the VCR.
Selects the VCR
input for the
Main Zone.
Selects the L7
Music listening
mode.
Selects the VCR
input for Zone 2.
Adjusts the Audio
Controls menu Main
Zone BALANCE
parameter to the
right.
10
Selects the TV
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the TV.
Selects the TV
input for the
Main Zone.
Selects the L7 TV
listening mode.
Selects the TV input
for Zone 2.
Sets the Main Zone
volume level to
-30dB.
11
Selects the CD
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the CD
player.
Selects the CD
input for the
Main Zone.
Selects the L7
Music Surround
listening mode.
Selects the CD
input for Zone 2.
Toggles the Setup
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY parameter.
12
Selects the Phono
command bank, which
includes commands
that control the
associated device.
Selects the
Phono input for
the Main Zone.
Toggles between
setting the input
to auto, analog or
digital.
Selects the Phono
input for Zone 2.
Deactivates the RV-5.
13
N/A
Selects Page 2 of
the Main Zone
command bank.
Selects Page 1 of
the Main Zone
command bank.
Selects Page 2 of
the Zone 2
command bank.
Selects Page 1 of the
Zone 2 command
bank.
14
Selects the Home command bank.
15
Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.
16
History-dependent*
10
11
12
13
16
14
15
MAIN
PAGE1
BUTTON
MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2
Increases the Main Zone volume level
in 1dB increments.
Increases the Zone 2 volume level in 1dB
increments.
* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.
2-18
Basic Operation
RV-5
BUTTON
ZONE3 PAGE1
DVD1 PAGE1
DVD1 PAGE2
Enters RV-5 standby mode.
Reserved for future expansion.
Activates the RV-5.
Toggles RT-10 or RT-20 power.
Displays the Status of
Zone 3.
Resets the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu BASS,
TREBLE, and TILT EQ
parameter to +0.0dB.
Opens and closes the RT-10 or RT-20 disc tray.
Deactivates Zone 3.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone BASS parameter
in.5dB increments.
Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Top menu.
Opens and closes the
RT-10 or RT-20 Video
Adjust bar.
Selects the TUNER input
for Zone 3.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone TREBLE parameter
in.5dB increments.
Activates RT-10 or
RT-20 random
playback.
Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Angle bar.
Selects the DVD1 input
for Zone 3.
Decreases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone TILT EQ parameter
in.2dB increments.
Activates RT-10 or
RT-20 repeat playback.
Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 condition
memory mode.
Selects the DVD2 input
for Zone 3.
Deactivates AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone LOUDNESS
parameter.
Activates RT-10 or
RT-20 A-B repeat
playback.
Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 last memory
playback.
Selects the Satellite
input for Zone 3.
Reserved for future
expansion.
Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Setup menu.
Creates up to five
shortcuts for frequently
adjusted RT-10 or RT-20
Setup menu parameters.
ZONE3 PAGE2
2-19
Basic Operation
Lexicon
BUTTON
ZONE3 PAGE1
13
16
2-20
14
DVD1 PAGE2
Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu BASS
parameter in .5dB
increments.
Closes certain Setup
menus without saving
the changes.
Activates and deactivates the RT-10 or
RT-20 rear- panel video
output connectors.
10
Selects the TV input for
Zone 3.
Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu
TREBLE parameter in
.5dB increments.
Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 display mode.
Controls the brightness
of front-panel display
characters.
11
Selects the CD input for
Zone 3.
Increases the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone TILT EQ parameter
level in .2dB increments.
Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Subtitle bar.
Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 search mode.
12
Selects the Phono input
for Zone 3.
Activates the AUDIO
CONTROLS menu Main
Zone LOUDNESS
parameter.
Opens the RT-10 or
RT-20 Audio bar.
Activates the RT-10 or
RT-20 program mode.
13
Displays Zone 3 Page 2
command bank.
Displays Zone 3 Page 1
command bank.
Displays DVD1 Page 2
command bank.
Displays DVD1 Page 1
command bank.
14
Displays the Home command bank.
15
Scrolls through Favorite Channel pages.
16
Increases Zone 3 volume level in 1dB increments
11
12
DVD1 PAGE1
Selects the VCR input
for Zone 3.
10
ZONE3 PAGE2
15
Increases RV-5 Main volume level in 1dB
increments
Basic Operation
RV-5
BUTTON
HOME
17
19
22
MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2
17
History-dependent*
Decreases Main Zone volume level in
1dB increments.
18
History-dependent*
Centers the AUDIO CONTROLS menu
Toggles between fully muting Main
Zone volume level and restoring Main BALANCE and FADER parameters.
Zone volume level to its original level.
19
History-dependent*
Toggles between muting Main Zone
volume level and restoring Main Zone
volume level to its original level.
Toggles between fully muting Zone 2
volume level and restoring Zone 2 volume
level to its original level.
20
History-dependent*
Scrolls upward through listening
modes.
Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu
Main Zone FADER parameter towards the
front.
21
History-dependent*
Scrolls downward through listening
modes.
Adjusts the AUDIO CONTROLS menu
Main Zone FADER parameter towards the
back.
22
History-dependent*
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press
next available preset.
23
History-dependent*
Activates the Trigger output connector labeled 1.
24
History-dependent*
If the RV-5’s but-in tuner is the currently selected input, press
to next available preset.
18
20
MAIN
PAGE1
21
23
Decreases Zone2 volume level in 1dB
increments.
24
to skip back to
to skip forward
* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.
2-21
Basic Operation
Lexicon
BUTTON
18
20
17
19
22
2-22
21
ZONE3 PAGE1
ZONE3 PAGE2
DVD1 PAGE1
DVD1 PAGE2
17
Decreases Zone 3 volume level in.1dB increments.
Decreases Main Zone volume level in.1dB
increments.
18
Activates the 5.1 THX, 5.1 THX Ultra2 or the THX
SurEX listening mode when a 5.1-channel THX
source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx+THX when
a stereo source is present.
Toggles between fully muting the RV-5 Main Zone
volume level and restoring Main Zone volume
level to its original level.
19
Toggles between fully muting Zone 3 volume level
and restoring Zone 3 volume to its original level.
Toggles between muting the RV-5 Main Zone
volume level and restoring Main Zone volume
level to its original level.
20
Increases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.
Scrolls upward through RV-5 listening modes.
21
Decreases Subwoofer output in 1dB increments.
Scrolls downward through RV-5 listening modes.
22
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected
to skip back to the next available
input, press
preset.
Skips to the beginning of the current chapter or
track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of
the previous chapter or track.
23
Activates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.
Activates playback of the loaded disc at regular
playback speed.
24
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected
to skip forward to the next
input, press
available preset.
Skips to the beginning of the next chapter or
track. Subsequent presses skip to the beginning of
the next chapter or track.
23
24
Basic Operation
RV-5
BUTTON
25
27
28
HOME
MAIN
PAGE1
MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2
25
History-dependent*
26
History-dependent*
27
History-dependent*
When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the ES decoding parameter,
cycling through the AUTO, ON, and OFF settings.
28
History-dependent*
Deactivates the output connector labeled Trigger 1.
29
History-dependent*
Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL listening mode when a
5.1- channel Dolby Digital source is present.
30
History-dependent*
When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.
31
History-dependent*
Opens the menu structure and selects the highlighted menu item, which opens
another menu, opens a parameter drop-down menu, or selects the highlighted
parameter setting.
32
History-dependent*
When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, press
once to tune
to the
next available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds activates seek mode, which
searches for the next available radio station. To enter Scan Mode, press and hold
until the display shows
SCAN or SCAN .
30
31
26
29
32
* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.
2-23
Basic Operation
Lexicon
BUTTON
25
26
25
27
28
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently
o nce to tune to the next
selected input, press
available tuner frequency. Pressing for 2 seconds
activates seek mode, which searches
for the next available radio station. To enter
Scan Mode, press and hold until the display
shows SCAN or SCAN .
DVD1 PAGE1
DVD1 PAGE2
When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans
through the disc in reverse direction.
When RT-10 or RT-20 playback is activated, scans
through the disc in forward direction.
When a DTS(-ES) source is present, toggles the
ES decoding parameter, cycling through the
AUTO, ON and OFF settings.
Opens the RT-10 or RT-20 disc menu.
28
Deactivates the output connector labeled
Trigger 1.
Stops playback of the loaded disc.
29
Activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or Dolby DIGITAL
listening mode when a 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital source is present. Activates Dolby PLIIx
Movie when a stereo source is present.
Activates RT-10 or RT-20 pause mode.
30
When a menu is open, scrolls upward through menu items.
31
Opens the menu structure and selects the
highlighted item. When no menu is open,
opens the MAIN MENU.
32
When a menu is open, scrolls downward through menu items.
26
29
32
2-24
ZONE3 PAGE2
27
30
31
ZONE3 PAGE1
Navigates to the right in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu
structure.
Basic Operation
RV-5
BUTTON
HOME
35
36
34
MAIN PAGE2 ZONE2 PAGE1 ZONE2 PAGE2
33
History-dependent*
When a menu is open, closes the menu and (in most cases), opens the previous
menu. Subsequent presses continue to close the current menu and open the
previous menu until the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are open, shows
the two-line status.
34
History-dependent*
When a menu is open, closes the menu structure. When no menus are open,
shows the 2-line status.
35
History-dependent*
Numbers 0 to 9, are used to enter the frequency of radio stations or to save/load
presets when the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input.
36
History-dependent*
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, toggles between AM/FM
frequency bands.
37
History-dependent*
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently selected input, pressing this button will
save the currently selected tuner frequency into a preset slot. Also use this button
when programming the remote. See page C-4 for additional information.
38
History-dependent*
Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See
page C-9 for additional information on how to use and program macros.
39
History-dependent*
Activates the remote control backlight that illuminates the buttons and LCD
screen for easier visibility.
39
33
MAIN
PAGE1
35
* History-dependent buttons perform different functions, depending on the Zone or device that is currently being controlled.
Check the bottom of the LCD for the currently controlled device.
37
38
2-25
Basic Operation
Lexicon
BUTTON
34
35
35
36
38
2-26
37
ZONE3 PAGE2
DVD1 PAGE1
DVD1 PAGE2
33
When a menu is open, closes the menu and, in
most cases, opens the previous menu.
Subsequent presses continue to close the current
menu and open the previous menu until
the MAIN MENU is closed. When no menus are
open, this button performs no function.
Navigates to the left in the RT-10 or RT-20 menu
structure.
34
When a menu is open, closes the menu structure.
When no menus are open, shows the
two-line status.
Selects the highlighted RT-10 or RT-20 menu item.
35
Numbers 0 to 9 are used to enter the
frequency of radio stations or to save/load
presets when the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the
currently selected input.
Direct RT-10 or RT-20 title, chapter, group or track
number selection.
36
If the RV-5 built-in tuner is the currently selected
input, toggles between AM/FM frequency
bands.
Enters values 10 and above on the RT-10 or RT-20.
Press once for numbers in the teens, twice for
numbers in the twenties, and so on. Then press a
number button (0 to 9) to enter a second digit.
37
If the RV-5’s built-in tuner is the currently
selected input, saves the currently selected tuner
frequency as a preset. Also used to program the
remote. See page C-4 for additional information.
Deletes entries when RT-10 or RT-20 search modes
and certain playback modes are activated.
38
Macro Buttons: M1 is for Macro 1, M2 is for Macro 2 and M3 is for Macro 3. See page C-9
for additional information on how to use and program macros.
39
Activates the remote-control backlight to illuminate the buttons and LCD screen for easier
visibility.
39
33
ZONE3 PAGE1
Basic Operation
RV-5
UNDERSTANDING THE ZONES
TWO-LINE STATUS
The RV-5 features two zones of operation: the Main Zone and Zone
2. The Main Zone controls audio and video signals in the primary
listening space. Zone 2 controls digital and analog audio and
composite or S-Video signals for a second zone or recording device.
The two-line status opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays
whenever the RV-5 detects a change in input source or listening mode.
The Main Zone two-line status appears when the RV-5 detects a Main
Zone change, and the Zone 2 (or Zone 3) two-line status appears
when a Zone 2 (or Zone 3) status change is detected.
The following are exceptions to independent zone operation:
1. The same Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input source can be simultaneously selected for the Main Zone and Zone 2. However,
different Dolby Digital or DTS(-ES) input sources cannot be
present in the Main Zone and Zone 2.
The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is used to
control the length of time the two-line status appears in the onscreen display. The ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu POSITION
parameter is used to control the vertical alignment of the two-line
status in the display device screen.
2. Zone 2 can provide a 2-channel downmix of Main Zone multichannel audio when all of the following conditions are met:
Note:
•
The same input must be selected in the Main Zone and
Zone 2.
•
A Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) or 5.1a input source must be
present in the Main Zone.
•
The INPUT SETUP menu ZONE2 IN parameter must be set to
DMIX. See “ZONE2 in Parameter Settings” on page 3-22 for
more information.
3. The Zone 2 audio output connectors will receive Front L/R when
a 5.1a source is present in the Main Zone and the ZONE2 IN
parameter is set to ANLG.
4. When 5.1a BYPASS or 2-CH BYPASS is selected, a downmix to
Zone 2 is not available.
When the display device is connected to a component video output
connector and the MAIN ADV menu COMPONENT OSD parameter is set
to OFF, the on-screen display does not appear on the associated display.
MAIN ZONE TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens in the on-screen and front-panel
DVD1
VOL
displays whenever the RV-5 detects a Main
FILM
-34dB
Zone status change. The Main Zone two-line
status indicates the current input, input source, listening mode and
volume level selected in the Main Zone.
ZONE 2 TWO-LINE STATUS
Opens in the on-screen and front-panel displays DVD1 ANLG
whenever the RV-5 detects a Zone 2 status ZONE 2
change. The Zone 2 two-line status indicates the
current input, input source and volume level selected in Zone 2.
VOL
-34dB
2-27
Basic Operation
Lexicon
TUNER STATUS
The Tuner status indicates the current frequency,
band, listening mode and volume level. The
Tuner status takes the place of the two-line status
display for inputs using the built-in tuner.
Note:
DVD1
L7 MUSIC
90.9 FM
-34dB
STATUS MENUS
Pressing the remote control STAT2 button opens the STATUS menu
for the current input source of the Main Zone, which contains
parameters that provide information about the current input source
and listening mode. STATUS menus are available for 2-channel,
Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and 5.1 analog input sources. Unlike most
other menus, STATUS menus cannot be opened through the
selection of menu options. Rather, the remote control STAT2 button
must be pressed.
To open and navigate the STATUS menu for the current input
source:
1. Under Zone 2 page 2, press “STAT2.” The first page of the
STATUS menu for the current input source appears in the onscreen and front-panel displays.
If the STATUS menu includes a second page, the PG1 indicator
appears in the top-right corner of the menu. Press the STAT2
button to open the second page. If the STATUS menu does not
include a second page, pressing the STAT2 button closes the
menu. If this occurs, begin again with step 1.
2. When the desired STATUS menu page has been opened, press
the remote-control Menu
and
arrows to scroll upward and
downward through the complete list of available parameters.
2-28
STATUS menu parameters provide information about the current
input source and listening mode. These parameters cannot be
adjusted.
3. Press the STAT2 button or the Menu
arrow to close the
STATUS menu. If the second page of the STATUS menu opens,
press the STAT2 button or the Menu
arrow again to close the
STATUS menu.
STATUS menu descriptions begin on the next page. The table
beneath each description lists the default and possible settings
for each parameter. STATUS menu parameter descriptions
begin on page 2-33. STATUS menu level meters are described
on page 2-34.
Basic Operation
RV-5
2CH STATUS
D STATUS
Provides information about 2-channel input sources. Features L and
R level meters.
Provides information about Dolby Digital input sources. Features
L, C, R, SL, SR and LFE level meters.
Parameter
Possible Settings
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
The current input
INPUT
The current input
MODE
The current listening mode
MODE
The current listening mode
INPUT TYPE
ANLG, PCM
CHANNELS
3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
BIT RATE
32 to 640kbps
EX ENCODED
MATRIX, NONE
SAMPLE RATE
48kHz
2.0 ENCODING
MATRIX, NONE
DIALOG OFFSET
–27 to +4dB
MIX ROOM
SMALL, LARGE
CENTER MIX LVL
–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB
SURR MIX LVL
+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
2 C H S TAT U S
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
S A M P L E R AT E
dB L
-6
-15
-30
-45
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
D STATUS
PG1
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODED
dB L
-6
-15
-30
SL SR
LFE
D STATUS
PG2
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
-45
2-29
Basic Operation
Lexicon
STATUS
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
Provides information about DTS(-ES) input sources. Includes L, C, R,
SL, SR, SB and LFE level meters. The SB level meter appears when a
6.1-channel input source is present, or when a 5.1-channel input
source is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.
Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources when
the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON.
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
The current input
Parameter
Possible Settings
MODE
5.1a BYPASS
INPUT
The current input
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS
MODE
The current listening mode
CHANNELS
3/3.1, 3/2.1
BIT RATE
754.5 to 1509.7 kbps
ES ENCODING
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF
WORD LENGTH
16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
S TAT U S
PG1
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
B I T R AT E
ENCODING
dB L
-6
-15
-30
-45
2-30
S L SR S B L F E
S TATSUTAT
S US
WWOORRDD LLEENNGGTTHH
SSAAMMPPLLEE RRAT
ATEE
PPGG21
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
5.1a BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS
Basic Operation
RV-5
2CH BYPASS STATUS
DIGITAL STATUS
Provides information about 2-channel analog input sources when
the MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.
Provides information about digital input sources for which a sample
rate is detected, but no audio is present in the input signal.
Parameter
Possible Settings
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
The current input
INPUT
The current input
MODE
2CH BYPASS
MODE
The current listening mode
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
---
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
2CH BYPASS STATUS
INPUT
MODE
2CH BYPASS
INPUT TYPE
BYPASS
DIGITAL STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
2-31
Basic Operation
Lexicon
5.1 ANALOG STATUS
LIVE! STATUS
Provides information about 5.1-channel analog input sources.
Provides information about LIVE! input sources. Features L and R
level meters.
Parameter
Possible Settings
INPUT
The current input
MODE
Parameter
Possible Settings
The current listening mode
INPUT
The current input
INPUT TYPE
ANLG
MODE
The current listening mode
SAMPLE RATE
96kHz
INPUT TYPE
MIC
SAMPLE RATE
48kHz
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
See “STATUS Menu Parameter Descriptions” on page 2-33 for detailed information.
5.1 ANALOG STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
2CH STATUS
ANLG
96kHz
INPUT
DVD1
MODE
LIVE! MED
INPUT TYPE
MIC
48kHz
SAMPLE RATE
dB L
-6
-15
-30
-45
2-32
Basic Operation
RV-5
STATUS MENU PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
2.0 ENCODING
MATRIX, NONE
Indicates whether or not a matrix-encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a matrix-encoded source is
detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a matrix-encoded
source is not detected. The RV-5 cannot automatically detect matrix
encoding in non-flagged input sources.
BIT RATE
32 to 640 kbps or 754 to 1509.7kbps
Indicates the rate at which the input signal is encoded. A higher bit
rate indicates that less compression was used during the encoding
process. Possible settings for Dolby Digital sources range from 32 to
640 kbps. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) sources range from 754 to
1509.7 kbps.
Possible settings for Dolby Digital input sources include 3/2.1, 3/2,
3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0 and 1/0. Possible settings for DTS(-ES) input
sources include 3/3.1 and 3/2.1.
DIALOG OFFSET
–27 to +4dB
Indicates the dialog normalization value applied to the input signal.
Dolby Digital input sources reproduce dialog at 27 decibels below fullscale (–27dBFS). When the dialog normalization value of the incoming
signal is higher or lower, the DIALOG OFFSET parameter indicates the
amount of adjustment the RV-5 makes to normalize dialog to –27dBFS.
ES ENCODING
DISCRETE, MATRIX, OFF
Indicates the relative level of the center channel that was used
during the mixing process.
Indicates whether or not a DTS-ES-encoded source is detected.
When the parameter setting is DISCRETE, a discrete 6.1-channel
DTS-ES source is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX,
a 5.1-channel DTS-ES source with a surround-encoded back
channel is detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a
standard DTS source with no DTS-ES encoding is detected.
CHANNELS
EX ENCODING
CENTER MIX LVL
–3.0dB, –4.5dB, –6.0dB
3/3.1, 3/2.1, 3/2, 3/1, 2/2, 2/1, 2/0, 1/0
Indicates the number of channels present in the input source. The
first digit indicates the number of front channels present. The digit
after the slash indicates the number of surround channels present.
The digit after the decimal point indicates the presence of LFE (lowfrequency effects) information. For instance, if the parameter setting
is 3/2.1, an input source with three front channels, two surround
channels and LFE information is present. LFE information is sent to
the Main Zone audio output connector labeled Sub.
MATRIX, NONE
Indicates whether or not a Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded source
is detected. When the parameter setting is MATRIX, a 5.1-channel
Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX is
detected. When the parameter setting is NONE, a standard 5.1channel Dolby Digital source recorded without Dolby Digital Surround
EX encoding is detected. The RV-5 cannot automatically detect Dolby
Digital Surround EX encoding in non-flagged input sources.
2-33
Basic Operation
Lexicon
INPUT
SURR MIX LVL
Indicates the selected input (e.g., DVD1).
Indicates the relative surround channel level that was used during
the mixing process.
INPUT TYPE
ANLG, BYP, PCM, MIC, ---
Indicates the input source that is present. When the parameter
setting is ANLG, a 2-channel analog audio source is present and the
MAIN ADV menu 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to OFF. When
the parameter setting is BYP (Bypass), a 2-channel analog audio
source is present and the 2-CH ANLG BYP parameter is set to ON.
When the parameter setting is PCM, a 2-channel digital audio
source is present. When the parameter is set to MIC, a microphone
source is present. When the parameter setting is ---, an unknown
digital audio source is present.
MIX ROOM
SMALL, LARGE
Indicates the size of the mixing room that was used during the
mixing process. When the parameter setting is LARGE, setting the
RE-EQUALIZATION parameter to ON for THX listening modes is
recommended.
MODE
Indicates the activated listening mode (e.g., L7 FILM).
SAMPLE RATE
44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz
Indicates the sample rate of the input source that is present.
2-34
+0.0dB, –3.0dB, –6.0dB
WORD LENGTH
16 bits, 20 bits, 24 bits
Indicates the word length of the audio data present in the input signal.
STATUS MENU LEVEL METERS
Most STATUS menus contain level meters that indicate fluctuating
input levels in the front left (L), center (C), front right (R), surround left
(SL), surround right (SR), surround back (SB) and subwoofer (SUB)
channels. These level meters indicate input levels for both analog and
digital input sources. For instance, the level meters indicate digital
audio input levels when a digital audio source is present.
Different combinations of level meters appear on each STATUS menu,
depending on the source that is present. The SB level meter appears
when a 6.1-channel source is present, or when a 5.1-channel source
is present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to ON.
Level meters appear in combinations of green, yellow and red when
the on-screen display is configured for a blue-screen background.
Green indicates low levels, yellow indicates normal levels, and red
indicates high levels and the onset of overload. Level meters appear
in white when the on-screen display is not configured for a bluescreen background.
3
Setup
Setup ..........................................................................................3-2
Input Setup.................................................................................3-4
Changing Input Names............................................................................. 3-5
Assigning Audio and Video Input Connectors ........................................... 3-7
Selecting Preferred Listening Modes........................................................ 3-12
Configuring Advanced Input Settings...................................................... 3-17
INPUT SELECT Parameter Settings........................................................... 3-19
ZONE2 in Parameter Settings.................................................................. 3-22
Speaker Setup ...........................................................................3-25
Setting Crossover Points.......................................................................... 3-25
Speaker Setup Parameters....................................................................... 3-29
Automatic Calibration ............................................................................. 3-36
Manual Calibration ................................................................................. 3-53
I/O Config.................................................................................3-60
Display Setup ............................................................................3-63
On-Screen Display Setup ........................................................................ 3-64
Front-panel Display Setup ....................................................................... 3-66
Volume Control Setup...............................................................3-68
Trigger Setup ............................................................................3-70
Tuner Setup ..............................................................................3-72
Tuner Region Band Limit And Increments ............................................... 3-73
Lock Options.............................................................................3-79
LIVE! CALIBRATION ...................................................................3-80
Setup
Lexicon
SETUP
Selecting SETUP from the MAIN MENU opens the SETUP menu.
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
and create and activate a custom unit name. See “DISPLAY SETUP”
on page 3-63 for more information.
DOLBY CONFIG
SETUP
DOLBY CONFIG
Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure
Main Zone, Mute, Zone 2, Zone 3 and Headphone volume levels. See
“VOLUME CONTROL SETUP” on page 3-68 for more information.
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the
on-screen and front-panel displays, identify display connection types,
and set the aspect ratio. See “DISPLAY SETUP” on page 3-5 for more
information.
Opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the
Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup,
set speaker distances and calibrate output levels. See “SPEAKER
SETUP” on page 3-23 for more information.
INPUT SETUP
POWER ON SETTINGS
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
Opens the INPUT SETUP menu, which is used to change input
names, assign audio and video input connectors, select preferred
listening modes and configure Main Zone and Zone 2 input settings.
See “INPUT SETUP” on page 3-5 for more information.
SURROUND CONFIG
SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
Opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the onscreen and front-panel displays, restore audio/video synchronization,
3-2
SETUP
POWER ON SETTINGS
Opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/
FM tuner. See “TUNER SETUP” on page 3-72 for more information.
Setup
RV-5
DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAY SETUP option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel
displays, restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUT SETUP
7.1 SETUP:
5.1+DSP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
POWER ON SETTINGS
DISPLAY TYPE:
CRT
4:3
ASPECT RATIO:
HDMI/DVI
CONNECTION:
YES
HDMI AUDIO OUT:
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PAN DISPLAY
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP
2-LINE OSD:
FULL OSD:
OFF
50s
FRONT PAN DISPLAY SETUP
BRIGHTNESS:
TIME OUT:
DISPLAY TYPE
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
CRT, DLP, F-PRJ, LCD, PLASMA, R-PRJ
DISPLAY TYPE
CONNECTION
SETUP
Opens the DISPLAY TYPE menu, which is used to assign the appropriate video display type.
FULL
OFF
DISPLAY SETUP
ANALOG, HDMI/DVI
CONNECTION
Opens the CONNECTION menu, which identifies the type of video
signal that is input to the display.
HDMI AUDIO OUT
ASPECT RATIO
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
4:3, 16:9
ASPECT RATIO
Opens the ASPECT RATIO menu, which is used to assign the appropriate aspect ratio. The 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square and most
commonly used for television. The 16:9 aspect ratio, also referred to
as Widescreen, is almost twice as wide as it is high.
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
YES, NO
HDMI AUDIO OUT
Opens the ASPECT RATIO menu, which is used to assign the appropriate aspect ratio. The 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square and most
commonly used for television. The 16:9 aspect ratio, also referred to
as Widescreen, is almost twice as wide as it is high.
3-3
Setup
Lexicon
2-LINE OSD
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
OFF, 3 TO 6 SECONDS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
2-LINE OSD
Opens the 2-LINE OSD menu, which is used to set the time that the
2-Line status display is visible. The OFF setting ensures that the
display is always visible. The 2-Line OSD can be set to turn off in 3 to
6 seconds, selectable in 1-second increments.
FULL OSD
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
30, 40, 50, 60 SECONDS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FULL OSD
Opens the FULL OSD menu, which is used to set the time that the
on-screen status display is visible. The OFF setting ensures that the
display is always visible. The FULL OSD can be set to turn off in 30 to
60 seconds, selectable in 10-second increments.
BRIGHTNESS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
FULL, HALF, OFF
FRONT PAN DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
Opens the BRIGHTNESS menu, which is allows the user to set the
brightness level of the RV-5 front display.
TIME OUT
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
OFF, 1 TO 10 SECONDS
FRONT PAN DISPLAY
TIME OUT
Opens the TIME OUT menu, which allows the user to set the time out
period or to disable the time out feature. The time delay parameters
are 1 to 10 seconds, selectable in 1-second increments.
3-4
Setup
RV-5
INPUT SETUP
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
Selecting the SETUP menu INPUT SETUP option opens the INPUT SETUP menu, a two-screen menu which sets up the input type and name, the
digital and analog inputs for both audio and video, the listening mode, speaker configuration, and other advanced input settings.
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
SPEAKERS
8-CH
INPUT:
5.1+A/D
I/O
CONFIG
SURROUND CONFIG
DISPLAYS
DOLBY SURR
SETUP
VOLUME
CONTROLS
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
TRIGGER
POWERSETUP
ON SETTINGS
TUNER
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2
DVD 1
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
ON
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
DEFAULT SUR:
VIDEO IN:
V-PROCESS:
ADVANCED VIDEO
A/V SYNC DELAY:
TRIGGER 2:
ZONE 2OUT:
USE LAST
HDMI 2
BYPASS
--0 ms
ON
ANALOG
The DVD1 INPUT SETUP menu is shown here as an example, and will continue to be shown as an example throughout this section.
Whenever it appears, any other INPUT SETUP menu can be substituted. Likewise, whenever the DVD1 input appears as a step in a
menu path, any other input can be substituted.
ADVANCED VIDEO 1
INPUT TYPE:
VCR
SHARPNESS:
32
NOISE REDUCTION: ON
X-COLOR SUPRESS: ON
DCDi INTERPOL:
ON
FILM DETECTION:
ON
FILM EDIT DETECT: ON
ADVANCED VIDEO 2
FLESHTONE NR:
COMPNT ENHANCE:
BRIGHTNESS:
CONTRAST:
COLOR:
TEST PAT:
ON
ON
100
100
100
OFF
All INPUT SETUP menus are shown in the Appendix on page A-6. The parameters on the left side of the INPUT SETUP menus are identical,
regardless of which input is selected. The parameter settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings differ from input to input.
The INPUT SETUP menus shown in the Appendix indicate factory-default parameter settings for each input.
INPUT
SETUP
HD, DVD, GAME, SAT, CABLE, DVR, CD,
DOCK, PC, TUNER, AUX 1, AUX 2
INPUT SETUP
INPUT
Opens the INPUT menu, which is used to assign the appropriate
input type.
3-5
Setup
Lexicon
CHANGING INPUT NAMES
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu NAME parameter opens the INPUT NAME menu, which is used to customize or restore the factory-default name
of the selected input. Factory-default input names correspond to front-panel and remote-control input selection button labels.
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
SPEAKERS
8-CH
INPUT:
5.1+A/D
I/O
CONFIG
SURROUND CONFIG
DISPLAYS
DOLBY SURR
SETUP
VOLUME
CONTROLS
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
TRIGGER
POWERSETUP
ON SETTINGS
TUNER
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
DVD1 INPUT NAME
DVD 1
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
ON
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
EDIT INPUT NAME
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
Opens the EDIT INPUT NAME drop-down menu, which is used to
customize the name of the selected input. Custom input names can
include up to eight characters.
To customize the name of the selected input:
1. Follow the EDIT INPUT NAME menu path to open the EDIT INPUT
NAME drop-down menu.
2. When the EDIT INPUT NAME menu opens, the current input
name appears on the second line. Using the remote-control
and
arrow buttons, change the character above the cursor (^).
3. When the desired character has been changed, press the
arrow
button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will
3-6
automatically wrap to the first character space when the last
character space is passed.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter all characters in the new name.
5. When the desired input name has been entered, press the arrow
button to close the menu and return to the INPUT NAME menu.
The custom input name appears in the on-screen and front-panel
displays. Both the custom and factory-default input names appear in
the INPUT SETUP menu. The custom input name appears against the
left margin of the on-screen display, and the factory-default input
name appears in parentheses against the right margin.
Setup
RV-5
ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
The RV-5 has eight configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to its ten digital audio, eight analog audio, the built-in tuner, the phono
input, two HDMI video, four composite video, four S-Video or three component video input connectors.
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
SPEAKERS
8-CH
INPUT:
5.1+A/D
I/O
CONFIG
SURROUND CONFIG
DISPLAYS
DOLBY SURR
SETUP
VOLUME
CONTROLS
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
TRIGGER
POWERSETUP
ON SETTINGS
TUNER
DVD DIG AUDIO
NONE
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
COAXIAL-1
HDMI
COAXIAL-2
COAXIAL-3
COAXIAL-4
OPTICAL-1
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
DVD 1
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
ON
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
The table below indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that
can be used to assign audio and video input connectors.
Parameter
Possible Settings
DIG AUDIO
COAX-1 to 4, HDMI-1, HDMI-2, OPTICAL-1 to 4,
NONE
ANLG AUDIO
ANALOG-1 to 6, 7.1 CHANNEL, TUNER, NONE
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT-1 to 3, COMPOSITE-1 to 4,
HDMI-1, HDMI-2, S-VIDEO-1 to 4
Note:
The digital audio input connectors are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,
88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources. The digital audio
input connectors are also compatible with MPEG or MP3 sources through
the DOCK input.
DIG AUDIO
SETUP
INPUT
COAXIAL-1 to 4, HDMI-1, HDMI-2,
OPTICAL-1 to 4, NONE
DIG AUDIO
Opens the DIG AUDIO menu, which is used to assign a digital audio
input connector for the selected input. The RV-5 has ten configurable
inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its ten digital audio
input connectors.
Please note the following:
•
When no digital audio input connector is assigned, the RV-5 will
automatically set the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT
parameter to ANALOG (see page 3-15).
•
A digital audio input connector must be assigned when no
analog audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the next page
for information about assigning an analog audio input
connector.
3-7
Setup
Lexicon
ASSIGNING AUDIO and VIDEO INPUT CONNECTORS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
SPEAKERS
8-CH
INPUT:
5.1+A/D
I/O
CONFIG
SURROUND CONFIG
DISPLAYS
DOLBY SURR
SETUP
VOLUME
CONTROLS
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
TRIGGER
POWERSETUP
ON SETTINGS
TUNER
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
(continued)
DVD1 ANLG AUDIO
NONE
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
7.1 CHANNEL
TUNER
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
DVD 1
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
ON
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
ANALOG IN
SETUP
INPUT
ANALOG-1 to 6, 7.1 CHANNEL, TUNER, NONE
ANLG AUDIO
Opens the ANLG AUDIO menu, which is used to assign an analog
audio input connector for the selected input. The RV-5 has eight
configurable inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its eight
analog audio input connectors.
The appearance of the ANLG AUDIO menu depends on the configuration of the analog audio input connectors.
•
The ANALOG IN menu (A above) appears when the I/O CONFIG
menu 8 STEREO INPUTS option is selected (see page 3-60).
•
The ANALOG IN menu (B above) appears when the I/O CONFIG
menu 5 ST. & 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see page 3-61).
•
The ANALOG IN menu (C above) appears when the I/O
CONFIG menu 2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG option is selected (see
page 3-61).
Please note the following:
•
3-8
When no analog audio input connector is assigned, the RV-5
automatically sets the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT
parameter to DIGITAL (see page 3-15).
•
An analog audio input connector must be assigned when no
digital audio input connector is assigned. Refer to the previous
page for information about assigning a digital audio input
connector.
•
The TUNER input corresponds with the internal AM/FM radio
tuner.
Setup
RV-5
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUTS
INPUT SETUP
SPEAKERS
8-CH
INPUT:
5.1+A/D
I/O
CONFIG
SURROUND CONFIG
DISPLAYS
DOLBY SURR
SETUP
VOLUME
CONTROLS
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
TRIGGER
POWERSETUP
ON SETTINGS
TUNER
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
DVD 1
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
ON
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2
DEFAULT SUR:
VIDEO IN:
V-PROCESS:
ADVANCED VIDEO
A/V SYNC DELAY:
TRIGGER 2:
ZONE 2OUT:
USE LAST
HDMI 2
BYPASS
--0 ms
ON
ANALOG
96kHz
48kHz
ON
OFF
DVD1 VIDEO IN
HDMI 1
HDMI 2
COMPONENT 1
COMPONENT 2
COMPONENT 3
S-VIDEO 1
S-VIDEO 2
S-VIDEO 3
S-VIDEO 4
COMPOSITE 1
COMPOSITE 2
COMPOSITE 3
COMPOSITE 4
VIDEO IN
DIG/ANLG AUTO
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
ON, OFF
INPUT
DIG/ANLG AUTO
SETUP
Opens the DIG/ANLG AUTO menu, which ...
A/D SAMPLE RATE
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
48kHz, 96kHz
INPUT
A/D SAMPLE RATE
Opens the A/D SAMPLE RATE menu, which...
INPUT SETUP
HDMI-1, HDMI-2, COMPONENT-1 to 3,
S-VIDEO-1 to 4, COMPOSITE-1 to 4
INPUT
VIDEO IN
Opens the VIDEO IN menu, which is used to assign the input
connector for the selected input. The RV-5 has thirteen configurable
video inputs, each of which can be assigned to any of its two HDMI,
four component, four S-Video, or four composite input connectors.
Note:
Composite video output connectors are available when a composite or
S-Video source is present. S-Video output connectors are available when
an S-Video source is present. The HDMI output connectors are available
when there is an HDMI source present.
3-9
Setup
Lexicon
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES
Preferred listening modes can be pre-selected so that when a
particular type of input source is played, the pre-selected listening
mode is activated.
The RV-5 allows five preferred listening modes for each Main Zone
input: one listening mode each for 2-channel, Dolby Digital,
DTS(-ES), 5.1a and MIC (LIVE!) sources. The table to the right
indicates the INPUT SETUP menu parameters that can be used to
select preferred listening modes.
Preferred Listening Mode Selection Parameters
2-CH
Selects a preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources
Selects a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital sources
Selects a preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources
5.1a
Selects a preferred listening mode for 5.1 analog sources
MIC
Selects a preferred listening mode for microphone sources (LIVE!)
Menus showing DVD1 parameters selected as preferred listening modes.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO
DVD1
NAME
COAX-1
DIGITAL IN
NONE
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
S-VIDEO-1
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
FILM
2-CH
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED
DVD1
MODE
FILM
MUSIC
2-CHAN
HEADPHONE
USE LAST
3-10
DVD1 5.1a MODE
5.1a
FILM
MUSIC
5.1a
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
HEADPHONE 5.1a
USE LAST
DVD1 2-CH MODE
DVD1
5.1
5.1
5.1
D MODE
FILM
TV
MUSIC
DIGITAL
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
HEADPHONE 5.1
USE LAST
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
HEADPHONE
USE LAST
Setup
RV-5
When a preferred listening mode is selected, that listening mode is
automatically activated whenever a new input is selected or an
appropriate input source is present. For example, the following can
occur when a preferred listening mode is activated (also refer to the
corresponding menus on 3-10):
If the DVD1 input is selected and a 2-channel source is played, the
L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a Dolby Digital source is
played, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode is activated. If a DTS(-ES)
source is played, the DTS(-ES) L7 FILM listening mode is activated.
Dynamic Listening Modes
Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions.
For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available when
the RV-5 is configured for seven main output channels and source
material with specific encoding is played. All Dynamic Listening
Modes are available through the remote control or front panel Mode
button. The dynamic listening modes are listed in the table below.
Dynamic modes
2-Channel
Dolby Digital
DTS
Dolby PLIIx + THX
Dolby PLIIx MOV
Dolby PLIIx MUS
DTS NEO:6 + THX
DTS NEO:6 CIN
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital EX
THX or THX UL2Cin or THX SurEX
THX MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DTS THX or DTS THX UL2Cin or DTS ES THX
DTS or DTS ES MATRIX or DTS ES DISCR
DTS THX MUSIC
DTS L7 FILM or DTS ES L7 FILM
DTS L7 MUSIC or DTS ES L7 MUSIC
DTS 2-CHAN or DTS ES 2-CHAN
Modes that Do Not Appear in the Input Setup Menu
The RV-5 features the ability to assign preferred listening modes for
each input and incoming audio format. However, not all listening
modes will appear in the Input Setup Menu. Listening modes that do
not appear in the Input Setup menu as preferred listening modes
under any circumstances are listed in the table below.
Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu
2-Channel
Dolby Digital
DTS
Dolby PLIIx + THX
Dolby PLIIx MOV
Dolby PLIIx MUS
DTS NEO:6 + THX
DTS NEO:6 CIN
THX MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DTS THX MUSIC
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
3-11
Setup
Lexicon
Modes that do not appear in the Input Setup menu
DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES
(continued)
The Use Last Parameter
When the RV-5 is set to use a preferred listening mode for a selected
input, selecting another mode from the Mode scroll list replaces the
preferred selection. However, this newly selected mode will be lost
when switching between inputs.
The USE LAST parameter was designed to allow the RV-5 software to
“remember” the last used listening mode for a given input source.
Once selected, that mode will always be active on the corresponding
input until another listening mode is selected as demonstrated in the
following example:
1.
Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS DVD1
USE LAST.
2. Press the MENU button.
When seven speakers are selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu, and
the appropriate source material is played, the dynamic listening
mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup menu) can
always be accessed using the MODE + or MODE - buttons whether
or not a preferred mode is set. When a preferred listening mode is set
and a dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the
input setup menu) is active, the selected dynamic mode is lost when
switching between inputs.
When USE LAST is selected as the preferred listening mode, and a
dynamic listening mode (or mode that does not appear in the input
setup menu) is active, the selected listening mode is retained when
switching between inputs, even when the RV-5 is set to standby as in
the following example:
3. Press the DVD-1 button.
1.
4. Play a DTS input source.
2. Press the MENU button.
5. Press the MODE + button until you reach DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN.
3. Press the DVD-1 button.
6. Press the TV button
4. Play a 2-channel input source.
The RV-5 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display
identifies the preferred listening mode.
7. Press the DVD-1 button.
The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode
for the DVD1 input is still DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN. As the DTS(-ES)
2-CHAN mode is a preferred listening mode, it can also be set in
the SETUP menu.
3-12
Select Main Menu SETUP INPUTS DVD1 2-CH
5. Press the MODE + button until you reach
USE LAST.
PLIIx MOV.
PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode.
6. Press the TV button
The RV-5 switches to the TV input and the on-screen display
identifies the preferred listening mode.
7. Press the DVD-1 button.
Setup
RV-5
The on-screen display should identify that the active listening mode
for the DVD1 input is still
PLIIx MOV. This is the only method of
setting up a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the
input setup menu) to behave like a preferred listening mode.
Note:
When a dynamic mode (or mode that does not appear in the input setup
menu) is set as in the above example, the setting is retained even when
the RV-5 is set to standby.
2-CH
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
2-CH
Opens the 2-CH MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred
listening mode for 2-channel input sources. The RV-5 activates the
selected listening mode whenever a 2-channel source is present.
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST:
DOLBY D
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
Opens the DOLBY DIGITAL MODE menu, which is used to select a
preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital input sources. The RV-5
activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is
selected or a new Dolby Digital source is present.
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST:
The RV-5 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time
a Dolby Digital source was present
The RV-5 activates the Dolby PLIIx MOV (Movie) listening mode if
this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital source
was present. Since Dolby PLIIx MOV is a dynamic listening mode, it
cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital
sources.
The RV-5 activates the listening mode that was activated the last time
a 2-channel source was present
The remote control 2 CH button toggles between the 2-CHANNEL
listening mode and the previous listening mode, and ignores the USE
LAST setting. Instead, it uses the listening mode (for example, L7
FILM) that was activated before the 2-CHANNEL listening mode.
The RV-5 activates a DTS NEO:6 listening mode if a DTS NEO:6
listening mode was activated the last time a 2-channel source was
present, and a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present. Since
the DTS NEO:6 listening modes are dynamic, they cannot be
selected as the preferred listening mode for 2-channel sources.
3-13
Setup
Lexicon
SELECTING PREFERRED LISTENING MODES (continued)
5.1a
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
5.1a
Opens the DTS(-ES) MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred
listening mode for DTS(-ES) input sources. The RV-5 automatically
activates the selected listening mode whenever a new input is selected or
a new DTS(-ES) source is present.
Opens the 5.1a MODE menu, which is used to select a preferred
listening mode for 5.1-channel analog sources. The RV-5 automatically
activates the preferred listening mode whenever a 5.1-channel analog
source is present.
When the DTS-ES parameter is set to USE LAST:
When the 5.1a parameter is set to USE LAST:
•
The RV-5 activates the listening mode that was activated the
last time a DTS(-ES) source was present
•
The RV-5 activates the DTS THX MUSIC listening mode if it was
activated the last time a DTS(-ES) source was present. Since
DTS THX MUSIC is a dynamic listening mode, it cannot be
selected as the preferred listening mode for DTS(-ES) sources.
The RV-5 activates the 5.1-channel analog listening mode that was
activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present. 5.1a
MUSIC cannot be selected as the preferred listening mode for 5.1channel analog sources. However, when the 5.1a parameter is set to
USE LAST, the RV-5 will activate 5.1a MUSIC if this listening mode
was activated the last time a 5.1-channel analog source was present.
3-14
Setup
RV-5
CONFIGURING ADVANCED VIDEO SETTINGS
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 MAIN ADV
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO
NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
NONE
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
S-VIDEO-1
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
FILM
2-CH
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED
DIGITAL
INPUT SELECT
OFF
ANALOG BYPASS
AUTO
S-VIDEO 16:9
ON
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
OFF
COMPONENT OSD
LEGACY VIDEO
FAST
FORMAT DETECT
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
SETUP
INPUTS
AUTO
OFF
ON
OFF
DIGITAL
ANGL
DMIX
INPUT SELECT
MAIN ADVANCED
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
NORMAL
FAST
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT
Selecting the INPUT SETUP menu MAIN ADVANCED option opens
the MAIN ADV menu shown above. The parameters on the left side
of this menu are identical, regardless of which input is selected. The
settings on the right side are adjustable. Default parameter settings
differ from input to input.
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input
connectors assigned to the current Main Zone input. The INPUT
SETUP menu is used to assign one digital and one analog audio input
connector for the selected input. The table on page 3-17 describes
INPUT SELECT parameter settings.
Parameter
Possible Settings
Note:
INPUT SELECT
ANLOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
LEGACY VIDEO
FORMAT DETECT
DIGITAL, ANALOG, AUTO
ON, OFF
AUTO, OFF
ON, OFF
ON, OFF
A, B
NORMAL, FAST
When the INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO, the RV-5 will not select
the assigned analog audio input connector when a valid digital audio
input source is present. Some DVD and CD players output digital signals
(data) when the player is paused or stopped or when the player is
powered on and the disc drawer is empty. When this occurs, the RV-5
automatically selects the assigned digital audio input connector.
3-15
Setup
Lexicon
CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)
ANALOG BYPASS
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED
ANALOG BYPASS
When set to ON, the RV-5 passes the analog input signal to the Main
Zone audio output connectors. For stereo analog sources, the input is
sent to the FRONT L/R outputs. For a 5.1-channel analog source, the
(L) input is sent to the FRONT L output. The (R) input is sent to the
FRONT R output. The (C) input is sent to the center output. The
(SUB) input is sent to the SUB output. The (LS) input is sent to the
SIDE L and REAR L outputs. The (RS) input is sent to the SIDE R and
REAR R outputs. When ANALOG BYPASS is set to OFF, the unit routes
the analog input signal through A/D conversion. This makes it
possible to utilize internal processing, including listening modes,
crossovers and equalization. Neither Zone 2 nor Zone 3 provide
multichannel outputs. If the 5.1-channel analog input is selected for
Zone 2 or Zone 3, only the front left and right (L)/(R) inputs will be
available.
When LIVE! is the selected analog input, the MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT parameter is forced to ANALOG, and ANALOG
BYPASS is disabled.
Note:
If the Main Zone source is 5.1 analog, only the Front L/R channels will be
sent to the Zone 2 S/PDIF outputs.
3-16
S-VIDEO 16:9
SETUP
INPUTS
AUTO, OFF
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
S-VIDEO 16:9
Controls the passage of anamorphic trigger signals present in some
video sources. When set to AUTO, the RV-5 allows anamorphic video
input signals to pass through the S-Video switcher, enabling
compatible display devices to automatically switch between
anamorphic and non-anamorphic display modes.
When OFF, the RV-5 prevents anamorphic video input signals from
passing through the S-Video switcher, preventing compatible
display devices from automatically switching between anamorphic
and non-anamorphic display modes.
Setup
RV-5
INPUT SELECT PARAMETER SETTINGS
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
The RV-5 sends the assigned digital audio
input connector to the Main Zone audio
output connectors. The RV-5 ignores the
assigned analog audio input connector.
The RV-5 sends the assigned analog audio input
connector to the Main Zone audio output
connectors. The RV-5 ignores the digital audio
input connector.
The RV-5 toggles between sending the assigned
digital and analog audio input connectors to the
Main Zone audio output connectors, based on the
input source that is present.
Note the following:
Note the following:
For example:
•
The digital audio input connectors
are compatible with PCM (44.1, 48,
88.2 and 96kHz), Dolby Digital and
DTS(-ES) sources.
•
The RV-5 automatically sets the INPUT
SELECT parameter to ANALOG when the
DIGITAL IN parameter is set to NONE.
•
•
•
The digital audio input connectors
are not compatible with MPEG or
MP3 sources. If an incompatible
digital audio source (e.g., MPEG or
MP3) is present, the RV-5 automatically selects the assigned analog
audio input connector.
The ANALOG IN parameter can be used to
assign an analog audio input connector
for the selected input.
When a 2-channel PCM, Dolby Digital or
DTS(-ES ) source is presen t, th e RV-5
automatically selects the assigned digital
audio input connector.
•
When an SACDTM source is present, the RV5 automatically selects the assigned analog
audio input connector.
•
•
•
The RV-5 automatically sets the
INPUT SELECT parameter to DIGITAL
when the ANALOG IN parameter is
set to NONE.
If ANALOG IN is set to NONE, the
RV-5 will mute.
The DIGITAL IN parameter can be
used to assign a digital audio input
connector for the selected input.
Note the following:
•
The RV-5 automatically sets the INPUT SELECT
parameter to AUTO when both digital and
analog audio input connectors are assigned.
•
When no compatible digital source is
present, the RV-5 automatically selects the
assigned analog audio input connector.
•
The AUTO setting is recommended for
components that generate both digital and
analog input signals, such as DVD/SACD
players.
3-17
Setup
Lexicon
CONFIGURING ADVANCE INPUT SETTINGS (continued)
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED
S-VIDEO OSD 4-3
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to an S-Video output connector. When set to
ON, the display device shows the on-screen display in a 4:3 aspect
ratio, regardless of the incoming signal.
Aspect ratio refers to the ratio between the height and width of the
picture on the display device or to the ratio between the height and
width of the display device. A 4:3 aspect ratio is almost square. A
16:9 aspect ratio, often referred to as “widescreen,” is almost twice as
wide as it is high.
When OFF, the display device shows the on-screen display in the
same aspect ratio as the incoming video input signal.
Note:
The on-screen display appears horizontally stretched across the display
device screen when all of the following conditions are present:
•
•
•
The S-VIDEO OSD 4:3 parameter is OFF.
An anamorphic video input signal is present.
A 16:9 display device (widescreen) is connected to an S-Video
output connector.
3-18
COMPONENT OSD
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED
COMPONENT OSD
Controls the appearance of the on-screen display when the display
device is connected to the component video output connector.
When ON, the display device shows the on-screen display as a 480i
video signal on a full blue-screen background. To minimize viewing
distractions, the two-line status does not appear in the on-screen
display. When OFF, the display device does not show the on-screen
display, including the two-line status.
Note:
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu BACKGROUND parameter is OFF,
the display device using the component video output connector will not
show the on-screen display.
Setup
RV-5
LEGACY VIDEO
SETUP
INPUTS
A, B
DVD1
MAIN ADVANCED
LEGACY VIDEO
ZONE2 IN
SETUP
INPUTS
DIGITAL, ANLG, DMIX
DVD1
ZONE2 IN
When video played back from a VCR is converted to component
video by the RV-5, the resulting picture quality depends on both the
quality of the VCR playback and the capabilities of the component
display device. The LEGACY VIDEO menu item has two selections, A
and B. Use the one that gives the best picture for the Combination of
the VCR and display device.
Controls the interaction of the digital and analog audio input
connectors assigned to the current Zone 2 inputs. The INPUT SETUP
menu can be used to assign one digital and one analog input
connector for the selected input. See page 3-7 for more information.
The table on the next page describes ZONE2 IN parameter settings.
Note:
Note
Some combinations of VCR and display device may not produce a
satisfactory picture with either setting. In such cases, better results may be
achieved by connecting to the display device via composite or S-video.
When using DTS-encoded discs, set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX.
FORMAT DETECT
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
NORMAL, FAST
MAIN ADVANCED
FORMAT DETECT
When the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, the unit recognizes
DTS-encoded discs as audio signals (not data signals) and outputs
loud digital noise from the ZONE2 analog and digital audio outputs.
For maximum flexibility with Dolby Digital and DTS (-ES) sources:
1. Select a Main Zone DIGITAL IN connector.
Controls how the RV-5 reacts when it detects silence in the digital
audio stream. Digital sources typically output a short period of silence
when switching between sources.
2. Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to ANLG.
When set to NORMAL, the RV-5 will not mute when silence is
detected. This setting is appropriate for most sources.
The unit will use the digital connector for the Main Zone, and the
analog connectors for Zone 2.
3. Connect the digital and analog outputs on the DVD player to the
corresponding digital and analog inputs on the RV-5.
When set to FAST, the RV-5 will mute when approximately 2ms of
continuous digital silence is detected. Once valid audio is received,
the RV-5 will configure its processing and deactivate mute. This
prevents digital noise from occurring during digital audio signal
changes. For example, when switching from Dolby Digital to DTS.
Use this setting if audible noise occurs during input digital format
changes.
3-19
Setup
Lexicon
ZONE2 IN PARAMETER SETTINGS
DIGITAL
•
The RV-5 automatically sets
the ZONE2 IN parameter to
DIGITAL when the ANALOG
IN parameter is set to NONE.
•
The RV-5 sends the assigned
D I G I TA L I N c o n n e c t o r
specified in the INPUT SETUP
menu to the ZONE 2
ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUTS.
•
•
3-20
Only PCM digital input
sources are compatible with
ZONE 2 analog audio
outputs. Dolby Digital and
DTS sources are compatible
with the Zone 2 digital audio
output when the DIG BYPASS
parameter is set to ON.
Audio will not be available in
Zone 2 analog outputs when
a Dolby Digital, DTS (-ES) or
unknown digital input source
is present.
ANLG (Analog)
•
The ANALOG IN connector
specified in the INPUT SETUP
menu is sent to the ZONE 2
ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUTS.
•
Only Front L/R Audio will be
available in Zone 2 when one
of the 5.1 analog inputs is
selected for the Main Zone.
DMIX (Downmix)
•
Set the ZONE2 IN parameter to DMIX to send a downmixed
version of Main Zone audio to the Zone 2 audio output
connectors. Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital,
DTS(-ES) and 5.1a sources.
•
To generate a downmix, the same input must be selected in
the Main Zone and Zone 2. Otherwise, the Zone 2 audio
output connectors will mute.
•
Main Zone listening mode activation affects the Zone 2 audio
output connectors. For instance, when the MONO listening
mode is activated in the Main Zone, the Zone 2 audio output
connectors will generate mono output signals.
•
It is recommended that you set the ZONE2 IN parameter to
DMIX when recording from a DVD player without built-in
Dolby Digital or DTS-ES decoding to a VCR or PVR (e.g. Tivo®
or Replay TV®).
•
A 2-channel downmixed version of Main Zone audio is sent to
the ZONE 2 ANALOG and DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS.
Downmixes can be generated for Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES) and
5.1 analog input sources. To generate a downmix, the input
that is selected in Zone 2 must also be selected in the Main
Zone (e.g., DVD1). Otherwise, the ZONE 2 ANALOG and
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUTS will mute. Downmixes cannot be
generated when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is selected in
the Main Zone.
Setup
RV-5
ZONE2 ADVANCED
SETUP
INPUTS
DVD1
ZONE2 ADVANCED
Opens the ZONE2 IN menu, which is used to configure advanced
MAIN MENU
SETUP
INPUT SETUP
DVD1 INPUT SETUP
DVD1 ZONE2 ADVANCED
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO
NAME
DVD1
DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
ANALOG IN
NONE
ANLG IN LVL
AUTO
VIDEO IN
S-VIDEO-1
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
FILM
5.1 FILM
FILM
5.1a
5.1a FILM
MIC
LIVE! MED
MAIN ADVANCED
ZONE2 IN
DIGITAL
ZONE2 ADVANCED
+0dB
ANLG IN LVL
OFF
DIGITAL BYPASS
44.1kHz
DIG OUT RATE
ENABLED
RECORD
Parameter
Possible Settings
ANLG IN LVL
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE
RECORD
-18dB to + 12dB
ON, OFF
96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz
BLOCKED, ENABLED
ANLG IN LVL
SETUP
INPUTS
-18 to +12dB
DVD1
ZONE2 ADVANCED
ANLG IN LVL
Allows adjustment of analog audio input levels for input signals sent
to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors. The RV-5 applies these
adjustments to input signals before passing them to the Zone 2
digital audio output connectors. This parameter can be adjusted
when an input source is present to prevent the internal A/D converter
from overloading.
3-21
Setup
Lexicon
DIGITAL BYPASS
SETUP
INPUTS
ON, OFF
DVD1
ZONE2 ADVANCED
DIGITAL BYPASS
Allows digital sources to bypass decoding for direct digital recording.
When ON is selected, the RV-5 passes digital input signals directly to
the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors, preserving the original
format of the input signal. This would be useful if you want to send a
multichannel-encoded signal to a second device for decoding. When
OFF is selected and the ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DIGITAL, Dolby
Digital and DTS sources will not be passed to the Zone 2 digital audio
outputs. When OFF is selected and a PCM source is present, the RV-5
will send the PCM audio to the Zone 2 digital audio output
connectors. If a Dolby Digital or DTS source is present and the
ZONE2 IN parameter is set to DMIX, a downmix of the source will be
sent to the Zone 2 digital audio output connectors.
DIG OUT RATE
SETUP
INPUTS
96kHz, 88.2kHz, 48kHz, 44.1kHz
DVD1
ZONE2 ADVANCED
DIG OUT RATE
Controls the sample rate of analog input signals sent to the Zone 2
digital audio output connectors.
When a value is selected, the RV-5 runs the Zone 2 A/D converters at
the selected sample rate. It is recommended to set the DIG OUT RATE
parameter to the appropriate value when using a recording format
that operates on a single sample rate, such as CD-R format (44.1kHz).
Note:
DIG OUT RATE only affects analog input signals. It does not change the
sample rate of digital input signals, or downmixed signals.
3-22
RECORD
SETUP
BLOCKED, ENABLED
INPUTS
DVD1
ZONE2 ADVANCED
RECORD
Prevents recording device feedback loops. When BLOCKED is
selected, the RV-5 blocks the Zone 2 audio output connectors to
prevent feedback loops. However, the RV-5 still passes video input
signals to the Zone 2 video output connectors. When ENABLED is
selected, the RV-5 passes audio and video input signals to the Zone 2
audio and video output connectors.
Setup
RV-5
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
SETUP
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu to configure the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker setup. The Main Zone includes eight
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUT SETUP
7.1 SETUP:
5.1+DSP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
POWER ON SETTINGS
REAR AMP: REAR SPK
AUTOMATIC
AUTO EQ ONLY
MANUAL
REAR AMP
SETUP
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
MANUAL SPEAKER/EQ
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
OFF
AUTO EQ:
ADJUST EQ
OFF
REAR SPK, ZONE 2
REAR AMP
Selects the REAR AMP menu, which....
AUTO EQ ONLY
SETUP
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
AUTO EQ ONLY
Selects the AUTO EQ ONLY menu, which controls the automatic
selection of the EQ.
AUTOMATIC
SETUP
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SETUP
Selects the AUTOMATIC menu, which controls the automatic
selection of crossover frequencies, channel adustments, delay
adjustments, and room equalization parameters.
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
MANUAL
Allows the user to manually make the selections for both speaker and
EQ setup.
3-23
Setup
Lexicon
SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
MANUAL SPEAKER/EQ
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
INPUT SETUP
7.1 SETUP:
5.1+DSP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
POWER ON SETTINGS
REAR AMP: REAR SPK
AUTOMATIC
AUTO EQ ONLY
MANUAL
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
AUTO EQ:
OFF
ADJUST EQ
ADJUST EQ
TILT:
OdB
ON
OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
AUTO SETTINGS:
OFF
ALL
INPUT:
TEST TONE:
OFF
FRONT LEFT:
+5dB
CENTER:
+10dB
FRONT RIGHT:
+5dB
SIDE RIGHT:
+10dB
REAR RIGHT:
--REAR LEFT:
--+10dB
SIDE LEFT:
0dB
SUBWOOFER 1:
SUBWOOFER 2:
0dB
RESTORE DEFAULTS: NO
3-24
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
AUTO SETTINGS:
UNITS:
FRONT LEFT:
CENTER:
FRONT RIGHT:
SIDE RIGHT:
REAR RIGHT:
REAR LEFT:
SIDE LEFT:
SUBWOOFERS:
RESTORE DEFAULTS:
OFF
FEET
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
80 Hz
NO
OFF
AUTO SETTINGS:
80 Hz
FRONT L/R:
80 Hz
CENTER:
SIDE L/R:
80 Hz
REAR/Z2 L/R:
80 Hz
SUBWOOFERS:
20 Hz
SUB HPF:
SUB/LFE LPF:
80 Hz
SUB MODE:
LFE ONLY
Setup
RV-5
AUTO EQ
SETUP
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
OFF, ON
AUTO EQ
MANUAL
Selects the AUTO EQ menu, which controls the automatic EQ
controls.
TILT
SETUP
Note:
It is important to set crossover points before calibrating output levels or
LIVE!. Setting crossover points afterwards could invalidate calibrated output levels and will invalidate the LIVE! calibration.
-8 TO +8DB
SPEAK/EQ SETUP
MANUAL
ADJUST EQ
TILT
ANALOG BYPASS
SETUP
Selects the TILT menu, which controls.....
INPUTS
DVD1
ON, OFF
MAIN ADVANCED
ANALOG BYPASS
When set to ON, the RV-5 passes the analog input signal to the Main
3-25
Setup
Lexicon
CUSTOM SPEAKER SETUPS
Selecting the CROSSOVER SETUP menu CUSTOM SETUP option opens the CUSTOM SETUP menu, which assigns independent crossover points for
each Main Zone audio output connector. Possible crossover settings include FULL, FULL + SUB, and 10Hz increments within a 30Hz to 120Hz
range. The graphs shown on the next page indicate the frequency response of each crossover point.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
CROSSOVER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGES
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
ASA
To configure a custom speaker setup:
•
Select the crossover point closest to the low frequency rating of
the associated speakers. For example, set the FRONT L/R
parameter to the crossover point closest to the low-frequency
rating of the front speakers.
•
Select the subwoofer crossover point equal to the lowest
crossover point of any of the other speakers. For example, if
CUSTOM SETUP menu parameters are set as shown above, set
the SUBWOOFER parameter to 40Hz – the lowest crossover
point of the other speakers.
3-26
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
80Hz
SUB
80Hz
80Hz
SL
80Hz
40 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
40 Hz
OFF
N/A
APART
RL
80Hz
In a custom setup, low frequencies are generally redirected from
speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the
lowest crossover points. Signals lower than the lowest crossover point
are redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL,
low-frequency signals, excluding LFE information, are not redirected
to the subwoofer.
Low frequencies between the Subwoofer and any or all of the other
speaker channels can be duplicated. To do this, select the FULL + SUB
crossover setting for the front, center, side or rear speakers. Making
this selection can result in excessive bass.
Setup
RV-5
In general, low frequencies will be redirected from speakers with the highest crossover points to speakers with the lowest crossover points. Lowfrequency signals lower than the lowest crossover point will be redirected to the subwoofer. If the lowest crossover point is FULL, low frequency
signals, excluding LFE information, will not be redirected to the subwoofer.
High-Pass Filter
High-pass filters attenuate low frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the
curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz. The graph above does not
show the THX 80Hz crossover point, which is 12dB per octave.
Low-Pass Filter
Low-pass filters attenuate high frequencies at 24dB per octave. The curves in the graph
above indicate the frequency response of each crossover setting. From left to right, the
curves represent crossover settings from 30Hz to 120Hz.
3-27
Setup
Lexicon
SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
CUSTOM SETUP
or
SETUP
The table below indicates the speaker setup parameters for configuring the Main Zone audio output connectors for the desired speaker
setup. These parameters are available in the CUSTOM SETUP and
THX SETUP menus.
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
THX SETUP
Speaker setup parameters perform the same function regardless of
the selected speaker setup. When a parameter setting is adjusted on
one menu, the corresponding parameter setting is automatically
adjusted on the other menu. For example, when a THX speaker setup
is selected, the crossover settings on the CUSTOM SETUP menu are
set to THX 80Hz.
CUSTOM SETUP Menu
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
THX SETUP Menu
Default Setting
Possible Settings
FRONT L/R*
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz
THX 80Hz
THX 80Hz
CENTER*
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
THX 80Hz
THX 80Hz
SIDE L/R*
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
THX 80Hz
THX 80Hz
REAR L/R
80Hz
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
THX 80Hz
THX 80Hz, NONE
SUBWOOFER*
80Hz
FULL, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
THX 80Hz
THX 80Hz
THX ULTRA2 SUB
OFF
ON, OFF
OFF
ON, OFF
BGC
N/A†
ON, OFF
N/A†
ON, OFF
ASA
APART
APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER
APART
APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER
* These parameters cannot be adjusted on the THX SETUP menu.
† When the THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, the BGC parameter is not available (N/A).
3-28
Setup
RV-5
SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
CROSSOVER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
ASA
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
SR
RR
80Hz
80Hz
80Hz
40Hz
60Hz
60Hz
60Hz
40Hz
OFF
N/A
APART
80Hz
SUB
80Hz
80Hz
SL
80Hz
RL
80Hz
S UB W O O F E R
R E A R L / R S P E A K ER S
S I D E L / R S P E AK E R S
C EN T E R S P E A K E R
F R O N T L / R SP E A K E R S
FULL
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL
FULL + SUB
3 0Hz
4 0Hz
5 0Hz
6 0Hz
7 0Hz
80Hz
THX 80 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0Hz
1 1 0Hz
1 2 0Hz
3-29
Setup
Lexicon
FRONT L/R
SETUP
SPEAKERS
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ
SET CROSSOVERS
CUSTOM SETUP
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SETUP
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120HZ, THX 80HZ, NONE
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
CUSTOM SETUP
CENTER
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors
labeled Front L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the
FRONT L/R SPEAKERS menu to select a crossover point for the Front
L/R output connectors.
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled CENTER when a custom speaker setup is selected. Opens the
CENTER SPEAKER menu to select a crossover point for the CENTER
output connector.
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the front speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the front speakers.
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the center speaker.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the center speaker.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the front
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.
(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the
upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB
option can result in excessive bass.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the center
speaker and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output. (The
set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the upper
range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option can
result in excessive bass.
•
When the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, select
NONE to redirect center channel signals to the Front L/R output
connectors – unless the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. In
this case, configure the speaker setup with the associated DVD-A/
SACD player to redirect center channel signals.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
THX SETUP
When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is
applied to the Front L/R output connectors, and the FRONT L/R
parameter cannot be adjusted.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
THX SETUP
When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is
applied to the Center output connector, and the CENTER parameter
cannot be adjusted.
3-30
Setup
RV-5
SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
SIDE L/R
SETUP
(continued)
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SIDE L/R
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors
labeled SIDE L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the side speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the side speakers.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the side
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.
(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the
upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option
can result in excessive bass.
•
When the speaker setup does not include side speakers, select
NONE to redirect side channel signals to the Rear L/R output
connectors. If the REAR L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the
RV-5 will redirect surround channel signals to the Front L/R
output connectors.
REAR L/R
SETUP
FULL, FULL + SUB, 30 to 120Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
CUSTOM SETUP
REAR L/R
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connectors
labeled REAR L/R when a custom speaker setup is selected.
•
Select FULL to send a full-range signal to the rear speakers.
Otherwise, select the crossover point closest to the lowfrequency rating of the rear speakers.
•
Select FULL + SUB to send a full-range signal to the rear
speakers and duplicate bass frequencies to the SUB output.
(The set crossover point of the SUB parameter determines the
upper range of duplicate bass.) Selecting the FULL + SUB option
can result in excessive bass.
•
When the speaker setup does not include rear speakers, select NONE
to redirect rear channel signals to the Side L/R output connectors. If
the SIDE L/R parameter is also set to NONE, the RV-5 redirects
surround channel signals to the Front L/R output connectors.
Note:
Note:
When the SIDE L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround
EX, THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, DTS(-ES) decoding, the ASA
parameter and PLIIx modes are not available.
When the REAR L/R parameter is set to NONE, Dolby Digital Surround EX,
THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, PLIIx modes, DTS(-ES) decoding and the ASA
parameter are not available.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
THX SETUP
When THX speaker setup is selected, a THX 80Hz crossover point is
applied to the SIDE L/R output connectors, and the SIDE L/R
parameter cannot be adjusted.
SETUP
SPEAKERS
SET CROSSOVERS
THX SETUP
When THX speaker setup is selected, the THX REAR SPEAKERS menu opens
which is used to activate or deactivate the REAR L/R output connectors.
To activate and configure the Rear L/R output connectors for a
7.1-channel THX speaker, setup select THX 80Hz. To deactivate the
Rear L/R output connectors and configure the Main Zone audio output
connectors for a 5.1-channel THX speaker setup, select NONE.
3-31
Setup
Lexicon
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
CROSSOVER SETUP
CUSTOM SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
ASA
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
SETUP
SPEAKERS
RR
60Hz
60Hz
SUB
40Hz
SUBWOOFER
SR
60Hz
40Hz
40Hz
SL
60Hz
RL
60Hz
FULL
3 0 Hz
4 0 Hz
5 0 Hz
6 0 Hz
7 0 Hz
80Hz
THX 8 0 Hz
90Hz
1 0 0 Hz
1 1 0 Hz
1 2 0 Hz
NONE
FULL, 30 TO 120 Hz, THX 80Hz, NONE
SET CROSSOVERS
THX SETUP
SUBWOOFER
Assigns a crossover point for the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer. When set to FULL, the RV-5 sends a full-range
audio output signal to this connector. Otherwise, the RV-5 activates a
crossover point at the selected setting. Choose the setting equal to
the lowest setting of the other speakers.
Note:
When the SUBWOOFER parameter is set to NONE, subwoofer signals
will not be redirected if the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated. To
redirect subwoofer signals, configure the speaker setup with the
associated DVD-A/SACD player.SETUP
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
INPUTS
3-32
S U B WO O F E R
40Hz
60Hz
60Hz
60Hz
40Hz
OFF
N/A
APART
Setup
RV-5
SPEAKER SETUP PARAMETERS
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
CROSSOVER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TRIGGERS
TUNER SETUP
TUNER
SETUP
LOCK
OPTIONS
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
CUSTOM SETUP
THX SETUP
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
!CAUTION!
PRESSING THE
BUTTON WILL
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGE
THE OUTPUTS TO A THX
SPEAKER CONFIGURATION
THX SETUP
60Hz
60Hz
SUB
40Hz
SL
60Hz
RL
60Hz
CUSTOM SETUP
ON
OFF
THX 80Hz
FRONT L/R*
THX 80Hz
CENTER*
THX 80Hz
SIDE L/R*
THX 80Hz
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER* THX 80Hz
OFF
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
N/A
ASA
APART
RR
40Hz
THX SPEAKER SETUP
SR
60Hz
40Hz
FRONT L/R
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUBWOOFER
ULTRA2 SUB
BGC
ASA
APART
CLOSE
TOGETHER
40 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
40 Hz
OFF
N/A
APART
* These parameters cannot be
adjusted.
THX ULTRA2 SUB
SETUP
SPEAKERS
ON, OFF
CUSTOM SETUP
ULTRA2 SUB
or
SETUP
SPEAKERS
THX SETUP
ULTRA2 SUB
Indicates whether or not the subwoofer connected to the Main Zone
audio output connector labeled Subwoofer is Ultra2-certified. Select
the ON setting if the connected subwoofer is Ultra2-certified and the
OFF setting if the connected subwoofer is not Ultra2-certified. When
set to ON, the CUSTOM and THX SETUP menu BGC parameter can
be used to adjust boundary gain compensation. When set to OFF, the
BGC parameter is not available (N/A).
3-33
Setup
Lexicon
BGC (BOUNDARY GAIN COMPENSATION)
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKERS
THX SETUP
ON, OFF
BGC
BGC
ASA (ADVANCED SPEAKER ARRAY) APART, CLOSE, TOGETHER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
CUSTOM SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKERS
THX SETUP
ASA
ASA
Adjusts boundary gain compensation when the CUSTOM and THX
SETUP menu THX ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to ON. When the
BGC parameter is set to ON, a highpass 55Hz filter is applied to all
audio output connectors for all Main Zone listening modes. When set
to OFF, no filter is applied to Main Zone listening modes and audio
output connectors. When the parameter setting is N/A, the THX
ULTRA2 SUB parameter is set to OFF, and boundary gain compensation cannot be adjusted.
A proprietary THX technology that processes signals sent to the rear
speakers, optimizing the listening experience for THX Ultra2 listening
modes. To maximize the effectiveness of ASA processing, it is recommended that you configure a 7-channel speaker setup in which the
rear speakers are placed close together facing the center of the
listening space. The ASA parameter is not available unless the 5.1
THX ULTRA2, 5.1 THX MUSIC, DTS THX ULTRA2 or DTS THX
MUSIC listening mode is activated.
Note:
Select the TOGETHER setting if the distance between the rear
speakers is less than 1 foot (0.3m). Select the CLOSE setting if the
distance between the rear speakers is greater than 1 foot (0.3m), but
less than 4 feet (1.2m). Select the APART setting if the distance
between the rear speakers is greater than 4 feet (1.2m).
BGC compensates for increased bass energy that is caused by the
proximity of the speakers to the listening room walls.
Note:
ASA processing is only available when both side and rear speakers are
present.
When the remote control 7/5 button is used to toggle between 7 and
5-channel playback:
3-34
•
ASA processing is not available during 5-channel playback.
•
The RV-5 automatically switches between the 5.1 THX ULTRA2
and 5.1 THX or DTS THX ULTRA2 and DTS THX listening modes.
Setup
RV-5
AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
The RV-5 offers automatic calibration of speaker distances, output level, or both. The table below indicates available automatic calibration options.
A successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration can be performed.
Automatic Options
Details
MICROPHONE CHECK
•
Confirms that the microphones are properly connected and functioning.
•
Calculates an average level for the microphones connected to the microphone input connectors,
allowing the RV-5 to compensate for individual microphone sensitivities during automatic calibration.
•
Ensures that microphone levels are consistent, eliminating automatic calibration errors from individual
microphone levels.
•
Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances and output levels.
•
Offers accurate calibration with minimal interaction, automatically applying calibrated speaker distances
and output levels.
•
Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening
position and the speaker.
•
Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output
levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).
•
Activates automatic calibration of speaker distances.
•
Provides a comparison between original and calibrated speaker distances, allowing selection of the
desired values.
•
Calibrates speaker distances within 0.5 foot (.15m) of the physical distance between the primary listening
position and the speaker.
•
Activates automatic calibration of output levels.
•
Provides a comparison between original and calibrated output levels, allowing selection of the desired
values.
•
Calibrates individual speaker output levels within +/–0.5dB of each other and overall speaker output
levels within +/–3.0dB of THX reference levels (75dB).
DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
LEVELS
3-35
Setup
Lexicon
CONNECTING THE MICROPHONES
CAUTION!
To connect the microphones:
•
4. Make sure the RV-5 is powered off OR in standby mode.
The microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit
require careful handling. Dropping or otherwise physically
abusing the microphones might cause errors during use or
irreparable damage to the microphones.
•
The microphone wires also require careful handling. Do not
sharply bend the wires or place objects on them.
•
Never make or break microphone input connections unless
the RV-5 is powered off with the rear-panel power switch,
OR standby mode is activated with the front-panel or
remote control standby button.
5. Connect the microphones included in the Lexicon Microphone Kit
to the microphone input connectors on the RV-5 rear panel. Make
sure the microphone cable plug is fully inserted for a solid
connection.
During the microphone check, the microphones will be
referred to as 1 or 2, based on the input connector to which
the microphone is connected. You should label the microphones for troubleshooting purposes.
6. Power on the RV-5 or deactivate standby mode.
Note the following:
•
Automatic calibration requires the microphones included in the
Lexicon Microphone Kit, available at authorized Lexicon dealers.
Performing automatic calibration with microphones other than
those in the kit will produce unpredictable results.
•
Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the
desired automatic calibration results. Pay particular attention to
the microphone placement instructions and illustrations included
in this section.
•
It is important to read and observe the care and handling
documentation included with the Lexicon Microphone Kit to
ensure optimal microphone performance.
•
If power is lost during automatic calibration of speaker levels or
speaker distances, previous settings may be lost and recalibration of speaker levels and speaker distances is required.
3-36
Setup
RV-5
POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR THE MICROPHONE CHECK
Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin below to position the microphones for the microphone check.
PROPER microphone positioning for the microphone check
During the microphone check, position
the microphones:
3 As close together as possible
3 Relatively centered between and equidistant from
the front left and right speakers
Rear
Left
3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals
3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement during the microphone
check. All of the microphones are positioned as close
together as possible in an unobstructed location that is
equidistant from the front left and right speakers.
Side
Left
Rear
Right
Side
Right
Front
Left
Microphone
Center
Subwoofer
Front
Right
3-37
Setup
Lexicon
IMPROPER microphone positioning for the microphone check
During the microphone check, DO NOT:
7 Separate the microphones
7 Scatter the microphones throughout the listening
space
7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the microphones and the speakers
7 Position the microphones on the floor, on seat
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture and
other fixtures, where echoes might obscure
calibration noise signals
Rear
Left
7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)
from any one speaker
The illustration to the right provides an example of
improper microphone placement during the microphone
check. The microphones are scattered throughout the
listening space rather than positioned as close together as
possible in a location that is equidistant from the front left
and right speakers.
Side
Left
Rear
Right
Side
Right
Front
Left
Microphone
Center
Subwoofer
Front
Right
3-38
Setup
RV-5
CHECKING THE MICROPHONES
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
CUSTOM
CHECK MICROPHONES
SETUP
GROUP MICROPHONES
40 Hz
INTO A BUNDLE
60 Hz IN THE
60THE
Hz ROOM
MIDDLE OF
60 Hz
PRESS 40TOHzBEGIN
OFF
MIC CHECK
N/A
APART
Note the following:
•
•
•
The RV-5 outputs calibration noise signals between 55dB and
95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments
until the microphones detect the required level. If the
calibration noise signal becomes too loud, press the
arrow
button to cancel the microphone check.
Although the calibration noise signal is output at a fixed volume
level, you should set all volume controls for associated components (i.e., speakers, subwoofers and power amplifiers) to a
reasonable level before performing automatic calibration.
When the procedure is finished, the RV-5 automatically reverts
to the last volume level that was selected before automatic
calibration began.
During automatic calibration, you should refer to the on-screen
display instead of the front-panel display, as additional information and instructions are available in the on-screen display.
2. The first CHECK MICROPHONES screen opens in the on-screen
display, indicating the importance of proper microphone
placement to achieve accurate automatic calibration results.
3. Press the
arrow button to begin the microphone check. The
following screens appears in the on-screen display as the microphone check is performed:
CHECKING FOR SILENCE
Appears in the on-screen display while
CUSTOM
CHECK MICROPHONES
SETUP
the RV-5 determines the relative noise
CHECKING FOR SILENCE
level of the listening space and the
PLEASE WAIT
internal noise level of the microphones.
After eliminating microphones that are
not detected or not functioning, the RV-5 calculates an average
level for all microphones.
1. Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu CHECK MICROPHONES option,
as shown above.
3-39
Setup
Lexicon
CHECKING MICROPHONES
Appears in the on-screen display while
CUSTOM
CHECK MICROPHONES
SETUP
the RV-5 confirms the microphone level
CHECKING MICROPHONES
calculated during the silence check. To
PLEASE WAIT
do this, the RV-5 sends alternating
calibration noise signals to the front left
and right speakers. These signals are output between 55dB and
95dB, beginning with 55dB and increasing in 5dB increments
until the microphones detect the required level. If the signal
becomes too loud, press the
arrow button to cancel the
microphone check.
The RV-5 uses the calibration noise signal to eliminate microphones that register the signal at a level that is too low or too
high. Then, the RV-5 determines the appropriate output level for
the calibration noise signal used during automatic calibration.
CHECK MICROPHONES Results
Appears in the on-screen display when the RV-5 is finished
checking the microphones. This display indicates the individual
check results for each microphone.
•
An OK result indicates that the microphone passed the
microphone check.
•
An ERROR result indicates that the microphone did not pass
the microphone check.
CHECK MICROPHONES
MIC 1
MIC 2
OK
ERROR
(MICROPHONE)
OK
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS
4. Press the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired microphone parameter. The RV-5 refers to the microphones according
to the input connector to which the microphone is connected.
5. Press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the
selected microphone. A message similar to the one shown at the
bottom of the previous column opens in the on-screen display.
Refer to the table on the next page for information about all
possible microphone check messages.
Note the following:
•
The RV-5 retains the calculated microphone level until the
SPEAKER SETUP menu is closed. Once this menu is closed,
another microphone check is required before automatic
calibration can be performed.
•
Optional microphone kits that include two microphones are
available. Perform automatic calibration with two microphones
that have passed the microphone check.
However, the RV-5 will perform automatic calibration as long as
at least one microphone passes the microphone check. In this
3-40
RV-5
Setup
circumstance, place the successfully checked microphone in the
primary listening position.
•
If a microphone check was successful, do not disconnect the
microphones from the microphone input connectors. If the
microphones are disconnected, you should perform the microphone check again before proceeding to automatic calibration.
3-41
Setup
Lexicon
CHECKING THE MICROPHONES
Message
(continued)
Description
Troubleshooting
(MICROPHONE)
OK
The microphone detected the calibration
noise signal without error.
•
N/A
(MICROPHONE)
NOT DETECTED
The RV-5 did not detect the microphone
during the silence check.
•
Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.
•
The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.
•
Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.
•
The microphones may be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone
placement examples that begin on page 3-37 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for the microphone check.
•
The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.
•
Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.
•
The microphones might be positioned too far from the front speakers. Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on page 3-37 to confirm that the microphones are
appropriately positioned for the microphone check.
•
The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.
•
Eliminate extraneous noises in the listening space, including conversations, air conditioners
and sounds that filter in through open doors and windows.
•
The microphone may be damaged. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer for assistance.
(MICROPHONE)
SIGNAL TOO LOW
(MICROPHONE)
OUT OF RANGE
(MICROPHONE)
TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE
The RV-5 detected the microphone during the silence check. However, the
microphone level determined during the
silence check was not confirmed during
the microphone check.
The microphone level is more than 20dB
below the highest microphone level.
The microphone level could not be
determined because of excessive room
noise in the listening space.
POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
Proper microphone placement is essential to achieving the desired
automatic calibration results. Microphone placement determines
whether the RV-5 calibrates optimal speaker distances and output
levels for a single listening position, several listening positions in a
single row, or several listening positions in the listening space.
3-42
•
Refer to the microphone placement examples that begin on the
next page to position the microphones for automatic
calibration. Select the microphone placement that best meets
the needs of the listening space.
Setup
RV-5
PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for a single listening position
When calibrating for a single listening
position, place the microphones:
3 As close together as possible in a single listening
position (the primary listening position)
3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head
will be during listening
Rear
Left
3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals
Side
Right
3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement when calibrating for a
single listening position. The microphones are
positioned as close together as possible in a single
listening position, allowing the RV-5 to calibrate optimal
speaker distances and output levels for that position.
Side
Left
Rear
Right
Front
Left
Microphone
Center
Subwoofer
Front
Right
3-43
Setup
Lexicon
POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
(continued)
PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in a single row
When calibrating for multiple listening
positions in a single row, position the
microphones:
3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head
will be during listening
3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals
Rear
Left
3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement when calibrating for
multiple listening positions in a single row. Each microphone is positioned in a single listening position within a
single row, allowing the RV-5 to calibrate optimal
speaker distances and output levels for that row at the
expense of a single listening position.
Side
Left
Rear
Right
Side
Right
Front
Left
Microphone
Center
Subwoofer
Front
Right
3-44
Setup
RV-5
PROPER microphone placement to achieve the best results for multiple listening positions in multiple rows
When calibrating for multiple listening
positions in multiple rows, position the
microphones:
3 At the approximate spot where the listener’s head
will be during listening
3 In a clear line-of-sight path with the speakers
3 In a location unobstructed by furniture and other
fixtures, where echoes will not obscure calibration
noise signals
Rear
Left
3 At least 2 feet (0.61m) from all speakers and
walls, but within 30 feet (9.14m) of all speakers
The illustration to the right provides an example of
proper microphone placement when calibrating for
multiple listening positions in multiple rows. Each microphone is positioned in a single listening position within a
row, allowing the RV-5 to calibrate optimal speaker
distances and output levels for a larger listening area at
the expense of a single listening position.
Side
Left
Rear
Right
Side
Right
Front
Left
Microphone
Center
Subwoofer
Front
Right
3-45
Setup
Lexicon
POSITIONING THE MICROPHONES FOR AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
(continued)
IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibration
During the automatic calibration, do not:
7 Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of
the listening positions or space
7 Position the microphones in spots where the
listeners’ heads will not be during listening
Rear
Left
7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the
microphones and the speakers
7 Position the microphones on the floor, on seat
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture
and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure
calibration noise signals
7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)
from any one speaker
Side
Left
Rear
Right
Side
Right
Front
Left
Microphone
Center
The illustration to the right provides an example of
improper microphone placement during the microphone
check. The microphones are positioned on the floor
along the perimeter of the listening space, making it
difficult for the RV-5 to calibrate optimal speaker
distances and output levels for the actual listening
positions.
3-46
Subwoofer
Front
Right
Setup
RV-5
IMPROPER microphone positioning for automatic calibration
During the automatic calibration, do not:
7 Arrange the microphones along the perimeter of
the listening positions or space
7 Position the microphones at spots where the
listeners’ heads will not be during listening
7 Obstruct the line-of-sight path between the
microphones and the speakers
Rear
Left
7 Position the microphones on the floor, on seat
cushions, or in locations obstructed by furniture
and other fixtures, where echoes might obscure
calibration noise signals
7 Position the microphones within 2 feet (0.61m) of
speakers and walls or more than 30 feet (9.14m)
from any one speaker
Side
Left
Rear
Right
Side
Right
Front
Left
Microphone
Center
The illustration to the right provides an example of
improper microphone placement during the microphone
check. The microphones are positioned on seat cushions
rather than in spots where the listener’s heads will be
during listening.
Subwoofer
Front
Right
3-47
Setup
Lexicon
PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
DISTANCES &40LEVELS
Hz
DISTANCES 60 Hz
60 Hz
OUTPUT LEVELS
60 Hz
40 Hz
PLACE MICROPHONES
AROUND PREFERRED
OFF
LISTENING POSITIONS
N/A
APART
!CAUTION!
40 Hz
60 Hz
HIGH AUDIO
LEVELS
60 Hz
Hz 10 SEC
YOU WILL60
HAVE
40 Hz
TO LEAVE THE
ROOM OR
OFF
SIT QUIETLY
N/A
PRESSAPART
TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10
PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN
Follow the procedures in the appropriate table column for the desired type of automatic calibration.
STEP
DISTANCES
DISTANCES & LEVELS
LEVELS
Select the SPEAKER SETUP menu AUTOMATIC option, as shown in the menu illustration above.
• If a microphone check is successful, the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu appears in the on-screen display. Press
the
or
arrow button to highlight the automatic calibration option you want. Then press the
arrow button to select
this option. Refer to the table on page 3-35 for more information about automatic calibration options.
MIC CHECK REQUIRED
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION
• If a microphone check is unsuccessful, one of the error messages shown to the right appears in the on-screen display, indicating that a successful microphone check is required before automatic calibration, and also the reason the previous check failed.
If this occurs, go back to “Connecting the Microphones” on page 3-36 and work your way back to this page.
NO MICROPHONE
DETECTED
The following AUTO SPEAKER SETUP messages are displayed before automatic calibration begins:
• The !CAUTION! HIGH AUDIO LEVELS message indicates that the RV-5 generates loud calibration noise signals during automatic calibration. If the signals become too loud, press the
arrow button to cancel automatic calibration. Press the
arrow button to open the next AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
menu.
• The countdown display notifies you that automatic calibration will begin in 10 seconds. The primary reason for the 10 second delay is to give you time
to leave the listening space before automatic calibration begins. If you choose to remain in the room, your movements could affect the calibration
results. If you leave the room, you can return in about 10 minutes (the calibration procedure should be completed). Press the
arrow button to
skip the countdown and begin automatic calibration. The RV-5 automatically activates automatic calibration when the countdown ends.
3-48
Setup
RV-5
SETTING SETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
STEP
SETTING SETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
DISTANCES
SETTING SETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM
12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
SETTING SETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
DISTANCES & LEVELS
The SETTING DISTANCES menu is displayed when the RV-5 calibrates speaker distances.
• During speaker distance calibration, the RV-5 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone
audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING DISTANCES menu. The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter
while the RV-5 calculates a distance for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each parameter,
the RV-5 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.
-2.0dB
ERROR
-2.0dB
-4.5dB
-3.0dB
-3.0dB
-4.5dB
N/A
LEVELS
This step does not occur when the AUTO
SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS option is
selected.
• Because of the way low-frequency signals propagate in most listening spaces, automatic speaker distance calibration often produces unreliable results for subwoofers. For this reason, the RV-5 does not
send calibration noise signals to the Subwoofer connector during speaker distance calibration. Instead,
the RV-5 automatically calibrates the subwoofer distance to the shortest distance of the other speakers.
These distances can be manually adjusted. See “PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION” on page 3-54.
This step does not occur when the AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP menu DISTANCES option is selected.
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
The SETTING LEVELS menu is displayed when the RV-5 calibrates output levels.
• During speaker levels calibration, the RV-5 sends calibration noise signals to the Main Zone
audio output connectors in the order shown on the SETTING LEVELS menu. The cursor automatically scrolls downward through speaker calibration parameters, highlighting each parameter while the RV-5 calculates an output level for the corresponding speaker. As it finishes each
parameter, the RV-5 enters the calibrated value or an ERROR message to the right of the parameter label.
3-49
Setup
Lexicon
PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)
STEP
DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
AUTO DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
FRONT LEFT
12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A
• A value indicates that no errors occurred
during the calibration procedure.
• An ERROR message indicates that a value
was calculated, but at least one error
occurred during the calibration procedure.
• Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the speaker calibration parameter
you want. Then press the
button to
view more detailed results for the
selected speaker. A message similar to
the one shown above will display.
• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.
• This menu is displayed, but not user
accessible during Auto Distance Calibration or after Auto Calibration.
3-50
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
AUTO LEVELS
DISTANCES
LEVELS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
Refer to the table on page
3-52 for information about
all possible speaker calibration messages.
If there was a DISTANCES calibration
error, an AUTO DISTANCES menu automatically displays.
LEVELS
OK
ERROR
AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS
When the RV-5 is finished calibrating
speaker distances and output levels, if there
was a calibration error, the AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP screen is displayed, indicating the
results for each calibration procedure.
• An OK message indicates that no errors
occurred during the calibration procedure.
• An ERROR message indicates that values
were calculated, but at least one error
occurred during calibration.
• Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired calibration procedure.
DISTANCES displays the AUTO DISTANCES screen shown in the left column
of this table.
LEVELS displays the AUTO LEVELS screen
shown in the right column of this table.
• Press the
procedure.
arrow button to select this
• Refer to the instructions in the appropriate column to view more detailed results
for each individual speaker.
• If a speaker is highlighted in either the
Distances or Levels menus, the speaker
name is displayed.
FRONT LEFT
-2.0dB
ERROR
-2.0dB
-4.5dB
-3.0dB
-3.0dB
-4.5dB
N/A
Refer to the table on page
3-52 for information about
all possible speaker calibration messages.
If there was a LEVELS calibration error, an
AUTO LEVELS menu automatically displays.
• A value indicates that no errors occurred
during the calibration procedure.
• An ERROR message indicates that a value
was calculated, but at least one error
occurred during the calibration procedure.
• Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired speaker calibration
parameter. Then, press the
arrow
button to view more detailed results for
the selected speaker. A message similar
to the one shown above will display.
• Refer to the table on page 3-52 for information about all possible speaker calibration messages.
• This menu is displayed, but not user
accessible during Auto Distance Calibration or after Auto Calibration.
Setup
RV-5
STEP
DISTANCES
SET DISTANCES
AUTO DISTANCES
AUTO DISTANCES
ORIGINAL DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
SR
RR
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
SUB
0.0ft
0.0ft
DISTANCES & LEVELS
12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
AUTO DISTANCES*
DISTANCES
LEVELS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
OK
ERROR
AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS
LEVELS
12.0ft
10.5ft
12.0ft
4.5ft
ERROR
6.0ft
4.5ft
N/A
AUTO LEVELS
AUTO LEVELS
ORIGINAL LEVELS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
0.0dB
0.0ft
SR
RR
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
SUB
SL RL
0.0ft
SET LEVELS
0.0dB
0.0dB
-2.0dB
ERROR
-2.0dB
-4.5dB
-3.0dB
-3.0dB
-4.5dB
N/A
SL RL
0.0dB
0.0dB
Use the SET DISTANCES menu to select
the desired speaker distances.
Use the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu to
select speaker distances or levels.
Use the SET LEVELS menu to select the
desired speaker levels.
1 Press the
arrow button to return to
the SET DISTANCES menu.
1 Press the
arrow button to return to the
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP results screen.
1 Press the
arrow button to return to
the SET LEVELS menu.
2 Press the
or
arrow button to toggle between calibrated speaker distances
(AUTO) and original speaker distances.
The speaker graphics at the bottom of
the menu update to indicate the selected
values.
2 To select the other calibration procedure,
follow the instructions in Step 5. Otherwise,
press the
button to return to the
SPEAKER SETUP menu.
• Press the
and
arrow buttons to
toggle between calibrated output levels
(AUTO) and original output levels. The
speaker graphics at the bottom of the
menu update to indicate the selected
values.
3 Press the
button to apply the
selected values. A confirmation message
is displayed to indicate the applied values.
Note: The AUTO DISTANCES screen is shown
above as an example. The AUTO LEVELS
screen can be substituted.
• Press the
arrow button to apply the
selected values. A confirmation message is
displayed to indicate the applied values.
4 Press the
button twice in succession
to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.
• Press the
arrow button twice in succession to return to the SPEAKER SETUP
menu.
The AUTO DISTANCES menu is only accessible after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is performed as a combined procedure.
The AUTO LEVELS menu is only accessible
after the DISTANCES & LEVELS calibration is
performed as a combined procedure.
3-51
Setup
Lexicon
PERFORMING AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (continued)
Message
Description
Troubleshooting
The RV-5 successfully calibrated the value
for the selected speaker without error.
•
N/A
(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER IS NOT ENABLED
The selected speaker is not present in the
speaker setup.
•
Set the corresponding CUSTOM or THX SETUP menu parameter to include the selected
speaker in the speaker setup. (The RV-5 only calibrates values for speakers that are included in
the speaker setup.)
(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE
The microphones detected out-of-phase
calibration noise signals, but the calibrated value is still accurate.
•
Examine speaker/associated amplifier connections to ensure that speaker wires are not crossed.
•
Dipolar speakers could cause this error. However, the RV-5 does not report this error unless at
least half of the microphones detect out-of-phase calibration noise signals.
(SPEAKER)
OK
•
Reflections from room objects could cause this error.
•
Drivers intentionally wired out-of-phase could cause this error.
•
The microphones might be positioned more than 30 feet (9.14m) from the selected speaker or in a
location where echoes obscure calibration noise signals. Refer to the placement examples on pages
3-40 to 3-44 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.
•
Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.
The microphones did not detect calibration noise signals or the RV-5 could not
calculate a value.
•
Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the
microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.
•
Examine microphone input connections to ensure that the microphones are properly connected to the RV-5 and that microphone cable plugs are fully inserted for a solid connection.
(SPEAKER)
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE
One or more microphones did not detect
calibration noise signals at a reasonable
level. The calibrated value could be inaccurate.
•
Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the
microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH
The microphones detected calibration
noise signals at an unusually high level.
•
Decrease associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.
•
The microphones may be positioned too close (within 2 feet [0.61m]) of the selected speaker.
Refer to the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW
The microphones detected calibration
noise signals at an unusually low level.
•
Increase associated amplifier volume levels – including (if applicable) powered subwoofer amplifiers.
•
The microphones may be positioned too far away (more than 30 feet [9.14m]) from the
selected speaker. See the microphone placement examples on pages 3-41 to 3-45 to confirm
that the microphones are appropriately positioned for automatic calibration.
(SPEAKER)
SIGNAL TOO LOW
(SPEAKER)
UNABLE TO CALCULATE
3-52
The microphones detected calibration
noise signals at an unusually low level.
Setup
RV-5
MANUAL CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
Selecting the SPEAKER SETUP menu MANUAL option displays the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu, to manually calibrate speaker distances and
output levels. The table below indicates available manual calibration options.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
CUSTOM
MANUAL SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES 40 Hz
LEVELS CALIBRATION 60 Hz
60 Hz
60 Hz
40RRHz
R SR
OFF
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
N/A
APART
0.0dB
SUB
0.0dB
Manual Options
0.0dB
SL RL
0.0dB
0.0dB
Details
SPEAKER DISTANCES
•
Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of speaker distances.
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
•
Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.
•
Automatically sends an internal calibration noise signal to each Main Zone audio output connector,
allowing for simultaneous output level adjustment.
•
Provides manual calibration and individual adjustment of output levels.
•
Requires an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.
•
Activates an appropriate listening mode based on the current Main Zone input source.
•
Provides amplitude limits for low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer, and low-frequency signals redirected to other Main Zone audio output connectors.
•
Protects speakers against input sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks.
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
3-53
Setup
Lexicon
PERFORMING MANUAL SPEAKER DISTANCE CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
SPEAKER DISTANCES
Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu SPEAKER DISTANCES option displays the SPEAKER DISTANCES menu, to manually calibrate speaker
distances.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
1. Follow the menu path shown above to select MANUAL SPEAKER
SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES. The SPEAKER DISTANCES menu
shown above will open in the on-screen display.
2. Press the
or
arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker
distance parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to select the
highlighted speaker distance parameter.
RR
0.0ft
0.0ft
SUB
0.0ft
To manually calibrate speaker distances:
SR
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
SPEAKERSETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
UNITS
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET
0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m
METERS
FEET
SL RL
0.0ft
0.0ft
3. To determine the appropriate speaker distance, measure the
distance between the primary listening position and the front of
the speaker.
For example, when the FRONT LEFT parameter is selected,
measure the distance between the primary listening position
and the front of the front left speaker (connected to the Main
Zone audio output connector labeled Front L).
4. When the speaker distance has been measured, press the
and
arrow buttons to set the parameter to the closest available
value.
3-54
Setup
RV-5
PERFORMING MANUAL OUTPUT LEVEL CALIBRATION
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
Selecting the MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP menu LEVELS CALIBRATION option displays the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu shown below, to manually
calibrate output levels.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
0.0dB
SR
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
RR
0.0dB
0.0dB
SUB
0.0dB
INTERNAL NOISE
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
0.0dB
0.0dB
LEVELS CALIBRATION
CUSTOM
SETUP
SL RL
0.0dB
0.0dB
SPEAKERSETUP
LEVEL ADJUST
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
-18.0 to +12.0dB
Note the following:
•
Use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter to manually calibrate
output levels. A SPL meter is a device that measures the relative
loudness of the speakers to ensure accurate output level
calibration. SPL meters are available from electronic retailers
such as Radio Shack.
•
Output levels should be calibrated from the primary listening
position, placing the SPL meter at the approximate location
where the listener’s head will be during listening.
•
Output levels for speakers that are not included in the speaker
setup cannot be adjusted during the internal noise test. These
output levels can be adjusted during the external noise test, but
there is no need to do so.
3-55
Setup
Lexicon
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
Opens the INTERNAL NOISE message shown on the previous page,
which indicates that the internal noise test generates loud calibration
noise signals.
To manually calibrate output levels during the internal noise test:
1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.
2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.
When the INTERNAL NOISE message opens:
•
Press the
arrow button to open the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
menu shown on the previous page. When the SPEAKER LEVEL
ADJUST menu opens, the internal noise test automatically
begins.
•
Press the
button to skip the internal noise test.
During the internal noise test, the RV-5 sends calibration noise signals
to each speaker in the order shown on the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
menu. The cursor automatically scrolls through output level parameters, highlighting each parameter as the RV-5 sends the calibration
noise signal to the corresponding speaker. The calibration noise
signal is sent to each speaker for about 4 seconds.
Note:
When the internal noise test begins, the RV-5 automatically sets
volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while
the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).
INTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP
3-56
3. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired output
level parameter. Then, quickly press the
button to select this
output level parameter. The horizontal bar graph shown on the
previous page will open in the on-screen display and automatic
scrolling will stop.
Note:
During the internal noise test, it is possible to select an output level
parameter just as the cursor is about to automatically scroll to the
next parameter, causing the RV-5 to send the calibration noise
signal to both speakers. If this occurs, reselect the desired speaker.
4. When the horizontal bar graph opens, press the
or
button
to select the output level that achieves a 75dB SPL meter reading
from the primary listening position.
5. Press
to close the parameter. The internal noise test will
continue and automatic scrolling will resume.
6. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 until all desired output levels have
been set.
Setup
RV-5
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
Selecting the LEVELS CALIBRATION menu EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
option opens the SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST menu shown on page 3-55,
which manually calibrates output levels.
The external noise test requires an external calibration source such as
an audio calibration disc. When the external noise test is conducted,
the RV-5 activates a listening mode based on the current Main Zone
input source. Refer to the table below for more information about
external noise test listening mode activation.
When a listening mode is activated during the external noise test, all
custom listening mode menu parameter settings are ignored. The
listening mode is applied to the current Main Zone input source in its
factory-default condition. When the external noise test is finished, the
listening mode returns to its custom condition.
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST LEVELS CALIBRATION MANUAL SPEAKERS SETUP
INPUT SOURCE
LISTENING MODE
2-Channel
Dolby Digital
DTS(-ES)
5.1-Channel Analog
PLII MOVIE,
PLIIx MOVIE*
DIGITAL**
Note:
When the external noise test begins, the RV-5 automatically sets
volume level to +0dB. Avoid adjusting the master volume level while
the test is in progress, to achieve THX reference levels (75dB).
To manually calibrate output levels during the external noise test:
1. Set the SPL meter to “C” weighting and “SLOW” response.
2. Place the SPL meter at the primary listening position.
3. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the output level
parameter you want. Then press the
button to select this
output level parameter.
The horizontal bar graph shown on page 3-55 is displayed.
4. Begin playback of the external calibration source and press the
or
arrow button to select the output level that achieves a 75dB
SPL Meter reading.
5. After selecting the output level, press the
the horizontal bar graph.
arrow button to close
6. Repeat steps 3, 4 and 5 until you have set all the output levels you
want.
5.1a BYPASS***
* These listening modes depend on the speaker configuration. Dolby Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
will only load when side and rear speakers are present.
**These listening mode names differ depending on the current input source, speaker
setup and parameter settings. Refer to the Listening Mode Descriptions section
beginning on page 6-4 for more information.
**If the Advanced Menu input is set to “ANALOG BYPASS OFF” the listening mode for the
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST is “5.1a STANDARD”.
3-57
Setup
Lexicon
SETTING BASS PEAK LIMITERS
SETUP
SPEAKERS
MANUAL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
The BASS PEAK LIMITERS option displays the BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu, to set amplitude limits on low-frequency signals sent to the Main Zone
audio output connectors, including the Subwoofer. The RV-5 is equipped with an internal limiter to prevent low-frequency signals from exceeding
a designated output level. This is essential for Dolby Digital and DTS(-ES) sources that produce low-frequency signal peaks at much higher output
levels than 2-channel sources. In home theaters, there is a danger of the subwoofers and their associated amplifiers overloading when attempting
to reproduce low-frequency signals.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITER
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
CAL NOISE
LIMITER
LIMIT ADJ
0.0dB
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
SR
ON
ON
100dB
RR
0.0dB
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
0.0dB
0.0dB
SUB
0.0dB
0.0dB
SL RL
0.0dB
75 to 120dB
0.0dB
ON
OFF
CAL NOISE
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Setting
CAL NOISE
ON
ON, OFF
LIMITER
ON
ON, OFF
LIMIT ADJ
100dB
75 to 120dB
SETUP
SPEAKERS
ON, OFF
MANUAL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
CAL NOISE
Determines whether bass peak limiters are set with an internal or
external calibration source.
To set the CAL NOISE parameter:
Note:
Configure BASS PEAK LIMITERS menu parameter settings whether
output levels are automatically or manually calibrated.
•
•
Select ON to activate an internal calibration noise signal to set
bass peak limiters.
Select OFF to deactivate the internal calibration noise signal.
Setting bass peak limiters with the calibration noise set to OFF requires
an external calibration source such as an audio calibration disc.
3-58
Setup
RV-5
LIMITER
SETUP
SPEAKERS
ON, OFF
MANUAL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
LIMITER
Limits low-frequency signals sent to the subwoofer or redirected to
other speakers.
To set the LIMITER parameter:
•
Select ON to restrict the output level of the low-frequency
signals to the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.
•
Select OFF to allow an unrestricted signal output level,
regardless of the LIMIT ADJ parameter setting.
LIMIT ADJ
SETUP
SPEAKERS
75 to 120dB
MANUAL
LEVELS CALIBRATION
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
LIMITER ADJ
Sets amplitude limits applied to the Subwoofer output connector,
and to other Main Zone audio output connectors to which lowfrequency signals are redirected.
To set the LIMIT ADJ parameter:
1. Select the LIMIT ADJ parameter.
The parameter initially sets to 75dB.
2. Press the
and
arrow buttons to change the parameter value.
The selected amplitude is applied when the SUB LIMITER
parameter is set to ON.
3-59
Setup
Lexicon
I/O CONFIG
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
The I/O CONFIG option is used to configure the analog audio input connectors as eight (Left/Right) stereo connectors, five (Left/Right) stereo
connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration (Front L/R, Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R), or as two stereo connectors and two 5.1-channel
configurations.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
REAR PANEL CONFIG
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
ANALOG INPUTS
AMP OUTPUTS
8 STEREO INPUTS
OR
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
OR
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
8 STEREO INPUTS
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
ANALOG INPUTS
8 STEREO INPUTS
Select the 8 STEREO INPUTS option to configure the analog audio
input connectors as eight stereo connectors.
3-60
When 8 STEREO INPUTS is selected:
•
All analog audio input connectors are configured as stereo
connectors.
•
The 5.1-channel connectors are not available.
•
Input sources that were assigned to the 5.1 ANLG (3-5) and 5.1
ANLG (6-8) are reassigned to the stereo connectors labeled 3
and 6, respectively.
Setup
RV-5
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
ANALOG INPUTS
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
SETUP
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
I/O CONFIG
ANALOG INPUTS
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
Configures the analog audio input connectors as five stereo
connectors and one 5.1-channel configuration.
Configures the analog audio input connectors as two stereo
connectors and two 5.1-channel configurations.
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as five
stereo and one 5.1-channel configuration:
When the analog audio input connectors are configured as two
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors:
•
The connectors labeled 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are configured as
stereo connectors.
•
The connectors labeled 1 and 2 are configured as stereo connectors.
•
•
The connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are configured as a 5.1-channel
connector. This connector is sent to the Main Zone audio output
connectors, as indicated in the table at the bottom of the next
column.
The connectors labeled 3, 4 and 5 are configured as a 5.1channel connector, and the connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are
configured as a 5.1-channel connector. These connectors are
sent to the Main Zone audio output connectors as indicated in
the table at the bottom of this column.
•
Two-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors
labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector
labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel connectors should only be
used with 5.1-channel analog sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.
•
2-channel sources that were assigned to the stereo connectors
labeled 3, 4 and 5 are reassigned to the 5.1-channel connector
labeled 5.1 ANLG (3-5). Two-channel sources that were assigned
to the stereo connectors labeled 6, 7 and 8 are reassigned to the
5.1-channel connector labeled 5.1 ANLG (6-8). The 5.1-channel
connectors should only be used with 5.1-channel analog
sources such as DVD-As and SACDs.
The 5.1-channel analog audio input connectors are sent to the Main
Zone analog audio output connectors, as shown in the table below.
Input Connector
Output Connector
(L)
Front L
(R)
Front R
(C)
Center
(SUB)
Sub
(LS)
Side L and Rear L
(RS)
Side R and Rear R
3-61
Setup
Lexicon
I/O CONFIG
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
AMP OUTPUTS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
ANALOG INPUTS
AMP OUTPUTS
MAIN 7.1
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0
MAIN 7.1
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0
AMP INPUTS
MAIN 7.1
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
AMP INPUTS
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE3 2.0
When set to MAIN 7.1, all of the amplifier outputs on the rear panel
will be configured for use in the Main Zone. Outputs 3 and 7 are
used for the rear speakers (Rear L/R).
Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 3. Outputs 1, 2,
4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input
source selected for Zone 3 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0
Note:
SETUP
I/O CONFIG
AMP INPUTS
MAIN 5.1 & ZONE2 2.0
Configures amplifier outputs 3 and 7 for use in Zone 2. Outputs 1, 2,
4, 5 and 6 will be configured for use in the Main Zone. The input
source selected for Zone 2 will be output on amplifier outputs 3 and 7.
Note:
If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning
message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will
be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE2 2.0 setting
is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing
any other button will cancel the change.
3-62
If the current speaker configuration is using rear speakers, a warning
message will appear alerting the user to the fact that the rear speakers will
be disabled for the Main Zone when the 5.1 MAIN & ZONE3 2.0 setting
is chosen. Press the right menu button to confirm the change. Pressing
any other button will cancel the change.
Setup
RV-5
DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAYS
Selecting the SETUP menu DISPLAYS option opens the DISPLAY SETUP menu, which is used to customize the on-screen and front-panel displays,
restore audio/video synchronization, and activate and create a custom unit name.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Parameter
Default
Setting
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
Refer to page 3-64
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
Refer to page 3-66
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
OFF, 1 to 60ms
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
ON, OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
N/A
N/A
OFF, 1 to 60ms
Possible Setting
3-63
Setup
Lexicon
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
Opens the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the on-screen display.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
STATUS
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
STATUS
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF
POSITION
TOP
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM
FORMAT
NTSC
SECAM, PAL, NTSC
BACKGROUND ON
ON, OFF
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
2 SECONDS
TOP
NTSC
ON
TOP
CENTER
BOTTOM
SECAM
PAL
NTSC
ON
OFF
STATUS
SETUP
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
DISPLAYS
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
STATUS
Activates and deactivates the on-screen display sent to the Main Zone
video output connector. When set to ALWAYS ON, the on-screen display
remains on at all times. When set to 2 SECONDS, the on-screen display
appears for 2 seconds whenever the input source changes or the RV-5
receives a command. When set to ALWAYS OFF, the on-screen display
remains off at all times. It will not reappear until the ON-SCREEN
DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.
Note:
When the ON-SCREEN DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to ALWAYS
OFF, the on-screen display immediately disappears. Use the front-panel
display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2 SECONDS.
3-64
Setup
RV-5
POSITION
SETUP
DISPLAYS
TOP, CENTER, BOTTOM
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
POSITION
Controls the vertical position of the two-line status on the display
device screen. When set to TOP, the two-line status appears near the
top of the display device screen. When set to CENTER, the two-line
status is centered on the display device screen. When set to
BOTTOM, the two-line status appears near the bottom of the display
device screen. Refer to page 2-28 for more information about the
two-line status.
FORMAT
SETUP
DISPLAYS
SECAM, PAL, NTSC
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACKGROUND
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON, OFF
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
BACKGROUND
Activates and deactivates the menu background. When set to ON,
on-screen display menus appear over a solid blue or gray background
(depending on the display device). When set to OFF, on-screen
display menus appear over the video input signal.
Note:
When the BACKGROUND parameter is set to OFF, the on-screen display
will disappear if the display device is using the component video output
connector.
FORMAT
Controls the compatibility between the video input connectors, the
video switcher and the display device. Select the setting that is
compatible with the source components and display device.
Note:
The FORMAT parameter affects the composite and S-Video output
connectors. It does not affect the component video output connector.
3-65
Setup
Lexicon
FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY SETUP
Opens the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu, which is used to customize the front-panel display.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
STATUS
BRIGHTNESS
ALWAYS ON
100%
ALWAYS ON
2 SECONDS
ALWAYS OFF
100%
75%
50%
25%
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
Note:
STATUS
ALWAYS ON
When the FRONT PANEL DISPLAY menu STATUS parameter is set to
ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display immediately disappears. Use the onscreen display as a guide to reset the parameter to ALWAYS ON or 2
SECONDS.
BRIGHTNESS 100%
STATUS
SETUP
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS,
ALWAYS OFF
100%, 75%, 50%, 25%
ALWAYS ON, 2 SECONDS, ALWAYS OFF
DISPLAYS
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
STATUS
Activates and deactivates the front-panel display. When set to ALWAYS
ON, the front-panel display remains on at all times. When set to 2
SECONDS, the front-panel display appears for 2 seconds whenever the
input source changes or the RV-5 receives a command. When set to
ALWAYS OFF, the front-panel display remains off at all times.
3-66
BRIGHTNESS
SETUP
DISPLAYS
100%,75%, 50%, 25%
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
Controls the brightness of front-panel display characters. When a
setting is selected, front-panel display illumination automatically
adjusts to the selected brightness.
Setup
RV-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
A/V SYNC DELAY
OFF
CUSTOM NAME
OFF
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
A/V SYNC DELAY
SETUP
DISPLAYS
OFF, 1 to 60ms
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
RV-5
ON
OFF
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 20 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
OFF, 1 to 60ms
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
SETUP
A/V SYNC DELAY
DISPLAYS
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
Restores audio/video synchronization when using products such as
video processors that introduce a video signal delay. This parameter
can be used to set an audio signal delay to compensate for the video
signal delay.
Opens the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu shown below, which can be
used to create a custom unit name. When the CUSTOM parameter is
set to ON, the custom unit name appears in the on-screen and frontpanel displays when the RV-5 is activated.
CUSTOM NAME
To customize the name of the RV-5:
SETUP
DISPLAYS
ON, OFF
CUSTOM NAME
Activates the display of a custom unit name, which appears when the
RV-5 is activated. When set to ON, the custom name scrolls across
the on-screen and front-panel displays when the RV-5 is activated.
When set to OFF, the custom name does not appear when the RV-5 is
activated. The custom name can be entered in the DISPLAY SETUP
menu EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu.
1. Follow the EDIT CUSTOM NAME menu path to open the EDIT
CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu shown below.
2. When the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down menu opens, press
the remote control
and
arrow buttons to change the
character above the cursor (^).
3. When the desired character has been selected, press the
arrow
button to advance to the next character space. The cursor will
automatically wrap to the first character space when the last
character space is passed.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the desired custom unit name.
5. When the desired custom unit name has been entered, press the
arrow button to close the EDIT CUSTOM NAME drop-down
menu and return to the DISPLAY SETUP menu.
3-67
Setup
Lexicon
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
Opens the VOLUME CONTROL SETUP menu, which is used to configure Main Zone, Zone 2, Zone 3, and Headphone volume levels.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
MAIN PWR ON
MUTE LEVEL
Z2 PWR ON
Z2 PWR ON
HEADPHONE
MAX VOLUME
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
-30dB
+12dB
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible Settings
MAIN PWR ON
–30dB
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
MUTE LEVEL
–30dB
–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL
Z2 PWR ON
–30dB
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
Z3 PWR ON
–30dB
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
HEADPHONE
–30dB
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
MAX VOLUME
–12dB
–80 to +12dB
MAIN PWR ON
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
MAIN PWR ON
Sets the Main Zone volume level that will be selected whenever the
Main Zone is activated. When set to LAST LVL, the Main Zone
activates at the volume level that was last selected in the previous
operating session.
3-68
LAST LVL, -80 to +12dB
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
MAIN PWR ON
-30dB
MUTE LEVEL
-30dB
ZONE
PWR
Z2
PWR
ON ON
-30dB
MAX
VOLON
+12dB
Z2
PWR
-30dB
HEADPHONE
-30dB
MAX VOLUME
+12dB
MUTE LEVEL
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
-10dB
-20dB
-30dB
-40dB
FULL MUTE
–40dB, –30dB, –20dB, –10dB, FULL MUTE
MUTE LEVEL
Sets the amount of attenuation that occurs in the Main Zone when the
front-panel or remote control Mute button is pressed. When set to FULL
MUTE, Main Zone volume level will be fully attenuated. Otherwise, Main
Zone volume level will be attenuated to the selected level.
Z2 PWR ON
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
ZONE PWR ON
Sets the Zone 2 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 2 is
activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 2 activates at the volume level
that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is
displayed on power up if the Zone 2 was powered off using the Zone
2 Off button on the remote control or front panel.
Setup
RV-5
Z3 PWR ON
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
ZONE PWR ON
Sets the Zone 3 volume level that will be selected whenever Zone 3 is
activated. When set to LAST LVL, Zone 3 activates at the volume level
that was last selected in the previous operating session. LAST LVL is
displayed on power up if the Zone 3 was powered off using the Zone
3 Off button on the remote control or front panel.
HEADPHONE
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
LAST LVL, –80 to +12dB
ZONE PWR ON
Sets the Headphone volume level that will be selected whenever
headphones are plugged in to the RV-5. When set to LAST LVL, the
headphones will activate at the last volume level that was selected
when they were last plugged in. When the headphones are
unplugged, the volume will revert to the MAIN PWR ON setting.
MAX VOLUME
SETUP
VOLUME CONTROLS
-80 TO +12dB
MAX VOLUME
Selects the maximum volume level for the Main Zone. When a value
is selected, the RV-5 automatically sets Main Zone volume level to the
selected value when the current level is higher.
3-69
Setup
Lexicon
TRIGGER SETUP
SETUP
TRIGGER
Selecting the SETUP menu TRIGGER option opens the
TRIGGER SETUP menu shown to the right, which can be used
to configure the trigger output connector labeled 1. The RV-5
rear panel houses two 12V DC trigger output connectors. The
connector labeled PWR – the power trigger output connector
– is not configurable. It is activated when the RV-5 is activated,
and deactivated when the RV-5 is deactivated. The trigger
output connector labeled 1 can be configured for remote or
program operation.
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
REMOTE ONLY
ON
ON, OFF
Program Operation
OFF
ON, OFF
REMOTE ONLY
SETUP
TRIGGER
ON, OFF
REMOTE ONLY
Configures the trigger output connector labeled 1 for remote
operation. When set to ON, this connector is configured for
remote operation. The remote control play and stop buttons
turns the trigger on and off. The RV-5 ignores all other
TRIGGER SETUP menu parameter settings. When set to OFF,
the trigger output connector labeled 1 is not configured for
remote operation. It can be configured for program operation.
3-70
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TRIGGER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO
ZONE2 INPUTS
ZONE3 INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx + THX
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII+ THX
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL + THX
PRO LOGIC
+ THX
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
SurEX
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
TRIGGER SETUP
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a
SurEX
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
* TRIGGER SETUP menu
listening mode names
are fixed, meaning
these names do not
change when certain
encoding is present. For
instance, the 5.1 THX
SurEX listening mode
label appears whether
THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, or no encoding is engaged.
ON
OFF
Setup
RV-5
PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETERS
SETUP
TRIGGER
ON, OFF
(PROGRAM OPERATION PARAMETER)
Configure the trigger output connector labeled 1 for
program operation. All TRIGGER SETUP menu parameters–
except the REMOTE ONLY parameter–are considered
program operation parameters. The connector can be
associated with multiple inputs and listening modes at the
same time.
When the REMOTE ONLY parameter is set to OFF and
program operation parameters are set to ON, the trigger
output connector labeled 1 is associated with the corresponding Main Zone inputs, Main Zone listening modes
or Zone 2 inputs. (The connector cannot be associated
with individual Zone 2 inputs; rather, it can be associated
with the Zone 2 inputs as a group.) When configured for
program operation, the connector is activated when the
corresponding inputs and listening modes are selected
and deactivated when the corresponding inputs and
listening modes are deselected.
Note:
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to
restore the factory default version of the selected listening
mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening
mode parameter is automatically set to OFF.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TRIGGER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
TUNER
PHONO
ZONE2 INPUTS
ZONE3 INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx + THX
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII+ THX
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PL + THX
PRO LOGIC
+ THX
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
SurEX
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
TRIGGER SETUP
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a
SurEX
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
* TRIGGER SETUP menu
listening mode names
are fixed, meaning
these names do not
change when certain
encoding is present. For
instance, the 5.1 THX
SurEX listening mode
label appears whether
THX Ultra2, THX Surround EX, or no encoding is engaged.
ON
OFF
3-71
Setup
Lexicon
TUNER SETUP
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
Selecting the SETUP menu TUNER SETUP option opens the TUNER SETUP menu, which is used to configure the AM/FM radio tuner.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
REGION
Parameter
Default
Setting
Possible Settings
REGION
USA
USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR
SCAN SENS
LOW
LOW, MED, HIGH
AUTOLOAD
N/A
N/A
CLEAR ALL
N/A
N/A
TUNER PRESETS
N/A
N/A
DISPLAY
RDS NAME RDS NAME, PRESET NAME,
FREQUENCY
RADIO TEXT
ON
ON, OFF
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST
AUTO FREQUENCY ON
3-72
USA
EUROPE
JAPAN
E. EUR
ON, OFF
SETUP
USA, EUROPE, JAPAN, E. EUR
TUNER SETUP
REGION
Sets the tuner region. The four regions are USA, EUROPE, JAPAN and
E. EUR. The table on the next page lists the band limits and increments for these regions.
Note:
The tuner user interface will not allow illegal frequencies to be entered. It
will always set at the closest valid frequency. For example, if the RV-5 has
USA set as the current region, entering 107.8MHz will result in 107.9MHz
being the actual tuner frequency. If the value is less than the lowest
frequency, it will set it to LO LIMIT for the appropriate region. Likewise, if
the dialed value is larger than the highest allowed frequency, it will
actually set it to the HI LIMIT for the appropriate region.
Setup
RV-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
SCAN SENS
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
LOW
MED
HIGH
LOW, MED, HIGH
REGION
Selects the Scan Sensitivity parameter, which can be used to set the
threshold the system will use to tune to a new station. The default
setting is LOW sensitivity (only the strongest station frequencies will
tune). If the LOW setting does not tune enough stations, try the MED
(medium) or HIGH settings.
TUNER REGION BAND LIMIT AND INCREMENTS
REGION
FM LO LIMIT
FM HI LIMIT
FM INCREMENT
AM LO LIMIT
AM HI LIMIT
AM INCREMENT
USA
87.90MHZ
107.90MHZ
200 KHZ/.2MHZ
520KHZ
1720KHZ
10KHZ
EUROPE
87.50MHZ
108.00MHZ
50KHZ/.05MHZ
520KHZ
1602KHZ
9KHZ
JAPAN
76.00MHZ
91.00MHZ
50KHZ/.05MHZ
522KHZ
1720KHZ
9KHZ
E. EUR
64.00MHZ
76.00MHZ
50KHZ/.05MHZ
520KHZ
1720KHZ
9KHZ
3-73
Setup
Lexicon
TUNER SETUP
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
USA
REGION
LOW
SCAN SENS
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
PRESS RIGHT J
TO START AUTOLOAD
AUTOLOAD
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
AUTOLOAD
Automatically scans and stores presets for the currently selected
frequency band.
To select the AUTOLOAD option, highlight AUTOLOAD in the TUNER
SETUP menu and press the right ( ) arrow. The message “PRESS
RIGHT TO START AUTOLOAD” appears in the on-screen and frontpanel displays.
•
To cancel the AUTOLOAD command, press the left (
•
AUTOLOAD skips presets with previously stored values and uses
the next available preset.
•
Once all available stations have been scanned, or if any TUNER
button is pressed (including the remote’s buttons), AUTOLOAD
will stop.
•
To autoload stations from the other frequency band, select that
band and restart AUTOLOAD.
3-74
) arrow.
Note:
Presets are saved when the unit is powered down. Because the
AUTOLOAD function preserves any existing presets, consider using the
CLEAR ALL function before using AUTOLOAD. Note that some channels
may be repeated in the preset section if AUTOLOAD is used more than
once since the last CLEAR ALL.
Setup
RV-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
CLEAR ALL
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
PRESS RIGHT J
TO CLEAR ALL PRESETS
TUNER PRESETS
CLEAR ALL
SETUP
Clears all of the presets. When this option is highlighted, press the
right ( ) arrow to select. The message “PRESS RIGHT
TO CLEAR
ALL PRESETS” will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays.
(Press the left ( ) arrow to cancel the CLEAR ALL command.)
TUNER SETUP
TUNER PRESETS
This selection provides an alternative access point to the TUNER
PRESETS menu. For more information, see “Tuner Presets” on
page 5-2.
This should be used after all presets have been entered but it is
desired to rescan in order to obtain new presets. For example, if you
have moved to a new city, it would be necessary to clear all existing
presets and scan for local stations.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
3-75
Setup
Lexicon
TUNER SETUP
(continued)
DISPLAY
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
RDS NAME, PRESET NAME, FREQUENCY
DISPLAY
Identifies the current channel setting, in the top right corner of the
OSD and front panel display. There are three possible selections: RDS
NAME, PRESET NAME, and FREQUENCY. The default setting is RDS
NAME.
PRESET NAME displays the name given to the preset frequency of the
currently selected channel. If the current channel is not a tuner
preset, then the channel frequency will be displayed.
RDS NAME displays the station's Program Service (PS) name, which is
intended to be used to identify a station or station program. If the
RDS information is not available, then the channel frequency will be
displayed.
FREQUENCY displays the actual frequency value of the channel
selected.
3-76
RDS NAME
PRESET NAME
FREQUENCY
Note:
In the US, some stations broadcast other information in place of the
Program Service (PS) name, such as a text messaging feature similar to
Radio Text (RT). This can make it difficult to identify the station. You may
wish to select PRESET NAME instead of an RSD NAME in this instance.
Setup
RV-5
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
RADIO TEXT
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
ON, OFF
RADIO TEXT
SCROLL RATE
SETUP
Activates the RADIO TEXT (RT) feature. Radio Text is presented as
scrolling text in the bottom row of the front-panel and on-screen
displays. Radio text can contain up to 64 characters and whatever
text the station broadcasts - such as the title and performer of the
current song, the station call letters or the station byline. Not all
stations broadcast RT. When tuned to a station that broadcasts Radio
Text, it will take approximately ten seconds to display the text.
ON
OFF
TUNER SETUP
SLOW, MEDIUM, FAST
SCROLL RATE
Controls the scrolling speed of the Radio Text. The default setting is
MEDIUM. For faster text scrolling, select FAST. For slower text
scrolling, select SLOW.
When Radio Text is active, additional information is displayed in the
scrolling text. After the RT from the radio station has finished
scrolling, double asterisks (**) are displayed, followed by the currently
set listening mode, volume level, and tuner frequency. A second set
of double asterisks identifies the end of the tuner information and the
beginning repeat of the station's Radio Text.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
REGION
USA
SCAN SENS
LOW
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
SLOW
MEDIUM
FAST
3-77
Setup
Lexicon
TUNER SETUP
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
USA
REGION
LOW
SCAN SENS
AUTOLOAD
CLEAR ALL
TUNER PRESETS
DISPLAY
RDS NAME
RADIO TEXT
ON
SCROLL RATE
MEDIUM
AUTO FREQUENCY
ON
AUTO FREQUENCY
SETUP
TUNER SETUP
ON, OFF
AUTO FREQUENCY
Checks for alternate frequency broadcasts in case of station drop out
or signal fade. The default setting is ON. Many radio stations
broadcast on several frequencies simultaneously. When active, AUTO
FREQUENCY checks for these alternate frequency broadcasts when
signal failure is detected.
If the main frequency drops out and AUTO FREQUENCY is activated,
the volume will mute briefly until the alternate broadcast is received.
AUTO FREQUENCY will only switch to a new frequency when
the following conditions are met:
•
The main frequency signal starts to fade.
•
The channel identification of the alternate frequency is an exact
match of the currently selected frequency.
•
The alternate frequency detected has a stronger signal strength
than the currently selected frequency.
3-78
ON
OFF
•
The AUTO FREQUENCY feature is ON.
Setup
RV-5
LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
Selecting the SETUP menu LOCK OPTIONS option opens the LOCK OPTIONS menu, which is used to protect MODE ADJUST, AUDIO CONTROLS
and SETUP menu branch parameter settings from accidental changes.
MAIN MENU
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
POWER MANAGEMENT
MODES
UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL UNLOCKED
SETUP
UNLOCKED
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
MODES
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
SETUP
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
MODES
SETUP
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
LOCK OPTIONS
MODES
AUDIO CNTRL
SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
AUDIO CNTRL
Controls AUDIO CONTROLS menu branch settings. When set to
LOCKED, these settings cannot be adjusted. When set to
UNLOCKED, these settings can be adjusted.
SETUP
SETUP
Controls MODE ADJUST menu branch settings, which includes all listening mode menu settings. When set to LOCKED, these settings
cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings can be
adjusted.
LOCKED
UNLOCKED
LOCKED, UNLOCKED
LOCK OPTIONS
SETUP
Controls SETUP menu branch settings. When set to LOCKED, these
settings cannot be adjusted. When set to UNLOCKED, these settings
can be adjusted.
3-79
Setup
3-80
Lexicon
4
Audio & Video Controls
Audio Controls ............................................................................4-2
Audio & Video Controls
Lexicon
AUDIO CONTROLS
Selecting AUDIO CONTROLS opens the AUDIO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the audio output connectors.
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
EQ PRESET
TONE CONTROLS OFF
BASS
+0.0dB
TREBLE
+0.0dB
AUDIO STATUS
EQ PRESET
PRESET 1: BYPASS
PRESET 2: BYPASS
PRESET 3: BYPASS
ACTIVE PS: USER
-5.0 to +5.0dB
EQ PRESET
AUDIO CONTROLS
PRESET 1, PRESET 2, PRESET 3, ACTIVE PS
EQ PRESET
TONE CONTROLS
AUDIO CONTROLS
OFF, ON
TONE CONTROLS
Actives or deactivates the tone controls.
BASS
AUDIO CONTROLS
–0.5dB to +5.0dB
BASS
Controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center, and Subwoofer.
The BASS Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the
frequency response of all BASS parameter settings. Bass setting can
be changed in 2dB increments.
4-2
TREBLE
AUDIO CONTROLS
The RV-5 provides 3 preset controls for the EQ plus one usercontrolled setting.
ON
OFF
-5.0 to +5.0dB
–5.0dB to +5.0dB
TREBLE
Controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut applied to the
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center. The TREBLE
Parameter Settings graph on the next page indicates the frequency
response of all TREBLE parameter settings. Treble setting can be
changed in 2dB increments.
Audio & Video Controls
RV-5
BASS Parameter Settings
The BASS parameter controls the amount of low-frequency boost or cut applied to the
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R, Center and Sub.
TREBLE Parameter Settings
The TREBLE parameter controls the amount of high-frequency boost or cut
applied to the audio output connectors labeled Front L/R and Center.
4-3
Audio & Video Controls
AUDIO CONTROLS
Lexicon
(continued)
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
AUDIO STATUS
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
EQ PRESET
TONE CONTROLS OFF
BASS
+0.0dB
TREBLE
+0.0dB
AUDIO STATUS
INPUT:
DVD 1
NAME:
CONNECTOR: HDMI 2
AUDIO:
UNLOCK
LISTEN TYPE: STEREO
TYPE:
2-CHANNEL
AUDIO STATUS
AUDIO CONTROLS
AUDIO STATUS
The AUDIO STATUS menu is an information-only menu identifying
the current audio status of the RV-5 unit. Input identifies the actual
audio source. Name identifies the title of the RV-5 as defined by the
user. Connector identifies the actual audio input port selected on
the rear panel. Audio identifies the audio input selected in the
control panel. Listen Mode identifies the currently selected
surround mode. Type identifies the currently selected surround
type.
4-4
Audio & Video Controls
RV-5
VIDEO CONTROLS
Selecting VIDEO CONTROLS opens the VIDEO CONTROLS menu, which is used to customize the video connectors.
MAIN MENU
VIDEO CONTROLS
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
4:3 IN > 16:9 DISP:
ORIGINAL
VIDEO STATUS
VIDEO STATUS
--INPUT RESOL:
COPY PROTECTION: OFF
VIDEO PROCESS: BYPASS
OUTPUT RESOL:
--COMPONENT OUT: 480i
OFF
S-VIDEO OUT:
OFF
COMPOSITE OUT:
ORIGINAL
AUTO
STRETCH 2
2.35 LB STRETCH
2.35 LB ZOOM
STRETCH
LB ZOOM
4:3 IN > 16:9 DISP
ORIGINAL, AUTO, STRETCH 2, 2.35 LB
STRETCH, 2.35 LB ZOOM, STRETCH, LB ZOOM
AUDIO CONTROLS
EQ PRESET
Identifies the display settings.
VIDEO STATUS
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO STATUS
The VIDEO STATUS menu is an information-only menu identifying
the current video status of the RV-5 unit. Input Resol. identifies the
current input resolution setting. Copy Protection identifies the
current status of the copy protection mode. Video Process identifies
the current setting of the video processor. Output Resol. identifies
the current output resolution setting. Component Out identifies the
currently selected component output type. S-Video Out identifies
the currently selected S-video output type. Composite Out
identifies the currently selected composite output type.
4-5
Audio & Video Controls
4-6
Lexicon
5
Tuner Presets
Tuner Presets ..............................................................................5-2
Tuner Presets
Lexicon
TUNER PRESETS
Selecting TUNER PRESETS from the MAIN MENU displays a list of the pages of existing presets. The preset number, preset name (if available),
frequency and broadcast band is displayed.
MAIN MENU
TUNER PRESETS
TUNER PRESETS
EDIT PRESET 1
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
FREQUENCY
BAND
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00FM
0.00
FM
STATION
LOADED
EDIT STATION NAME
LISTEN TO PRESET
NAME
CLEAR PRESET
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
PRESS MENU
TO CLEAR PRESET
Each tuner preset page
allows up to 10 preset
stations.
In the US, each preset channel is identified by the station's call
letters, or what their broadcast information identifies as the call
letters. In Europe and Japan, each preset channel is identified by the
station's Program Service (PS) name. If RDS information is not
available, then the Preset name will be Preset XX, where XX is the
listed number location in the Preset menu for that position. For
example, if Preset #01 is FM 90.90 and the call letters are WABC,
then the name for that position is WABC.
To edit a preset, press the menu /
arrows until the desired
preset is highlighted, then press the menu
arrow to open the
parameters menu for the selected preset.
Parameter
LISTEN TO PRESET
NAME
CLEAR PRESET
5-2
Tuner Presets
RV-5
LISTEN TO PRESET
TUNER PRESETS
PAGE 1
CLEAR PRESET
01
LISTEN TO PRESET
Loads the current preset station. Press the menu
arrow to load
the station preset. The front panel and on-screen display will display
“STATION LOADED.”
TUNER PRESETS
PAGE 1
01
CLEAR PRESET
Clears the current preset entry. The front-panel and on-screen
display will display “PRESS MENU
TO CLEAR PRESET.” Press the
menu arrow to cancel without clearing the preset.
NAME
TUNER PRESETS
PAGE 1
01
NAME
Edits the station name. The station name can be up to 8 characters
long. The available characters are letters A to Z, numbers 0 to 9,
and 10 additional symbols: ., -, +, :, (, ), !, @, # or a blank space.
5-3
Tuner Presets
5-4
Lexicon
6
Mode Adjust
Mode Adjust ...............................................................................6-2
Listening Mode Activation...........................................................6-2
Listening Mode Descriptions .......................................................6-4
Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions........6-39
Mode – Parameter Relationships ...............................................6-47
Mode Adjust
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
* These listening mode
names differ depending on the current
input source, speaker
setup and parameter
settings. Refer to the
Listening Mode
Descriptions for more
information.
6-2
Lexicon
MODE ADJUST
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx MOV*
PLIIx MUS*
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PRO LOGIC
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV*
5.1 PLIIx MUS*
DIGITAL EX*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM*
MUSIC*
2-CHAN*
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
Selecting the MODE ADJUST option opens the MODE ADJUST menu, which is
used to select a listening mode for adjustment. When the MODE ADJUST menu
opens, the currently activated Main Zone listening mode is highlighted.
Selecting a listening mode does not activate that listening mode
for the current Main Zone input source. Rather, selecting a listening
mode opens the corresponding listening mode menu, which is used to
customize the selected listening mode. These adjustments are applied
when the listening mode is selected with one of the methods described in
the Listening Mode Activation section that begins below.
LISTENING MODE ACTIVATION
Listening modes are available for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), MIC and
analog input sources. The RV-5 allows listening mode selection for all Main
Zone sources. In some cases, the RV-5 automatically activates a listening mode
in response to certain commands. For this reason, it is important to understand
the three methods through which listening mode activation occurs.
Note:
When headphones are plugged into the RV-5, all listening modes are downmixed
to two channels with the following exceptions: HEADPHONE L7, HEADPHONE 5.1,
HEADPHONE DTS and HEADPHONE 5.1a. These listening modes are described in
detail on page 6-27.
Listening mode activation occurs through:
•
the INPUT SETUP menu preferred listening mode selection parameters
(page 3-12).
•
the front-panel or remote control Mode button (page 2-17).
•
the remote control listening mode family selection buttons (page 2-17).
Mode Adjust
RV-5
PREFERRED LISTENING MODE SELECTION
LISTENING MODE SELECTION BUTTONS
The INPUT SETUP menus include four preferred listening mode
selection parameters labeled 2-CH, DOLBY D, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and
MIC. These parameters are used to select a preferred listening mode
for 2-channel, Dolby Digital, DTS(-ES), 5.1a and LIVE! input sources.
The RV-5 automatically activates the selected listening mode
whenever a new input is selected or a new input source is present.
The remote control listening mode selection buttons can be used
to activate the Logic 7 Film, Dolby, DTS(-ES), Logic 7 Music, or
Logic 7 TV listening mode that is appropriate for the Main Zone
input source. For instance, if the L7 button is pressed while a
2-channel source is present, the L7 FILM listening mode is
activated. The table below indicates the listening modes associated
with each mode family selection button.
MODE
AND
BUTTONS
The front-panel and remote-control Mode arrow buttons can be
used to audition listening modes with the current Main Zone input
source. Pressing these buttons scrolls up ( ) or down ( ) through
listening modes available for the current Main Zone source.
Listening modes are scrolled in the order that appears in the MODE
ADJUST menu.
For example, if a 2-channel input source is present, press the
or
arrow buttons to scroll through available 2-channel listening
modes. The selected listening mode appears in the bottom-left
corner of the Main Zone two-line status.
Dynamic Listening Mode Selection
Dynamic listening modes are only available under certain conditions. For example, many of the dynamic modes are only available
when the RV-5 is configured for seven main output channels and
source material with specific encoding is played. All dynamic
listening modes are available through the remote control or front
panel Mode button.
Button
2-Channel
Sources
Dolby Digital
Sources
DTS(-ES)
Sources
5.1a
Sources
L7 F
L7 FILM
5.1 L7 FILM
DTS(-ES) L7 FILM
5.1a L7 FILM
L7 M
L7 MUSIC
5.1 L7 MUSIC
DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC
5.1a L7 MUSIC
L7 TV
L7 TV
5.1 L7 TV
MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**
N/A
L7 MS
L7 MUSIC
SURROUND
5.1 L7 MUSIC
DTS(-ES) L7 MUSIC
N/A
DOLBY
DOLBY PLIIx MOV
DD 5.1 PLIIx MOV*
MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**
N/A
DTS NEO:6 CIN
MODE SELECTION
NOT AVAILABLE**
DTS(-ES)
N/A
DTS
* These listening mode names differ depending on the input source, the speaker configuration and certain parameter settings. For 5.1 systems with only side or rear speakers (but not both), pressing the
button loads the DOLBY DIGITAL mode.
** The “MODE SELECTION NOT AVAILABLE” message appears in the on-screen and
front-panel displays when no listening mode is available for the Main Zone input
source that is present.
*** For ES source.
See “Dynamic Listening Modes” on page 3-13 for a complete
listing of dynamic listening modes.
6-3
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
LISTENING MODE DESCRIPTIONS
Each listening mode description lists the default and possible settings for each listening mode menu parameter. All listening mode menus are
shown in the Appendix. Listening mode menu option and parameter descriptions begin on page 6-30.
L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
L7 TV
FILM
MODE ADJUST
TV
This listening mode is designed for enhanced playback of 2-channel
stereo or matrix-encoded film sources.
This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or
matrix-encoded television broadcast sources.
Logic 7 FILM is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that derives
seven channels from 2-channel input sources. Logic 7 also derives
full-frequency stereo surround channels that realistically increase
the perceived width, length and sense of envelopment of the
listening space. Logic 7 provides remarkable improvement
compared to other decoders.
Logic 7 TV is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the
Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for broadcast
sources.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON
ON, OFF
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-4
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON
ON, OFF
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
FILM
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
L7 MUSIC SURR
MODE ADJUST
MUSIC
This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo or
matrix-encoded music sources.
Logic 7 MUSIC is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode based on the
Logic 7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music
sources.
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
MUSIC SURR
This listening mode is designed for playback of 2-channel stereo
music sources recorded in real spaces and for playback of
recordings that contain added reverb. It is recommended for
classical music sources, which are often recorded in real spaces with
added reverb to enhance the stereo mix.
Logic 7 MUSIC SURR is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that is
similar to the MUSIC SURROUND listening mode in other Lexicon
products. Logic 7 extracts ambient sounds from the input source
and sends these sounds to all speakers. Ambient sounds are heard
from all directions, creating a realistic playback presentation that
simulates what listeners experience in real spaces.
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING
MSURR
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-5
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
DOLBY PLIIx MOV & DOLBY PLII MOVIE
MODE ADJUST
PLIIx MOVIE
OR
MODE ADJUST
PLII MOVIE
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II
that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or
7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound
from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.
Dolby PLIIx MOV and Dolby PLII MOVIE modes:
Note:
The PLIIx MOV mode does not appear in the list of available listening modes
if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Parameter
•
Are designed for playback of Dolby Surround-encoded sources.
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
•
Provide impressive enhancement compared to Dolby Pro Logic
decoding.
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
•
Are appropriate for Dolby Surround-encoded film sources.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear
speakers are present.
Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode
The DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode
and cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel
Dolby Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx
Mov listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the
DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode using the front-panel or remote
control Mode buttons.
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MOV listening mode if this listening
mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded film source was present.
6-6
Mode Adjust
RV-5
DOLBY PLIIx MUS & DOLBY PLII MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
PLIIx MUS
OR
MODE ADJUST
PLII MUSIC
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology is an extension to Dolby Pro Logic II
that enables the listener to experience natural and seamless 6.1- or
7.1-channel (six or seven speakers and a subwoofer) surround sound
from any native two-channel (stereo) or 5.1-channel source.
The PLIIx listening mode is only available when the front, side and rear
speakers are present.
Note:
The DOLBY PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
PANORAMA
OFF
ON, OFF
Activating the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode
CTR WIDTH
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX
The DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and
cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for 2-channel Dolby
Surround-encoded film sources. To activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS
listening mode, play the 2-channel source input, and select the DOLBY
PLIIx MUS listening mode using the front-panel or remote control
Mode buttons.
DIMENSION
NEUTRAL
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
SURROUND DLY
10ms
0 to 15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 will automatically activate the DOLBY PLIIx MUS listening mode if this listening
mode was activated the last time a 2-channel Dolby Surroundencoded film source was present.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-7
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
DOLBY PRO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
DTS NEO:6 CIN & DTS NEO:6 MUSIC
PRO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
The Dolby PRO LOGIC mode is designed for playback of Dolby
Surround-encoded sources. It decodes four channels from Dolby
Surround-encoded sources, and uses a mono surround channel
with a high-frequency rolloff above 7kHz.
This mode is useful for comparison purposes, particularly with the
L7 FILM, Dolby PLIIx MOVIE and DTS Neo:6 CIN listening mode.
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
CIN
OR
MUSIC
These modes are designed for playback of matrix-encoded digital
stereo film or music sources. DTS Neo:6 derives six channels when
both side and rear speakers are present (rear channels will be in
parallel). It derives five channels when only side or rear speakers are
present.
These listening modes are dynamic listening modes and cannot be
assigned as preferred listening modes. To select either of these
listening modes, use the remote control or front-panel Mode
button. When the 2-CH parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 will
automatically activate a DTS Neo:6 listening mode if this mode was
activated the last time a 2-channel source was present.
Note:
•
The RV-5 will not automatically activate a DTS NEO:6 listening
mode unless a 44.1kHz or 48kHz PCM digital source is present.
The DTS Neo:6 listening modes are not available with 88.2kHz or
96kHz, Dolby Digital or analog sources.
•
The DTS Neo:6 MUSIC listening mode can be activated with the
front-panel or remote control Mode buttons. The DTS Neo:6 CIN
listening mode can also activated with the remote control DTS
button when a 2-channel input source is present.
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-8
Mode Adjust
RV-5
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST
NIGHTCLUB
The NIGHTCLUB mode is designed for playback of “dry” music
sources that benefit from the addition of room reflections,
especially music sources that lack ambience in the recording. The
NIGHTCLUB mode generates early reflections and sends them to
the front, side and rear channels to simulate small, intimate
listening spaces.
The NIGHTCLUB mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.
CONCERT HALL
The CONCERT HALL mode generates early reflections and sends
them to the front, side and rear channels to simulate large listening
spaces.
The CONCERT HALL mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER DEPTH
12
0 to 18
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
SPEECH DETECT
ON
ON, OFF
CENTER DEPTH
11
0 to 18
SIZE
20m
4 to 20m
SPEECH DETECT
ON
ON, OFF
LIVENESS
1.72s
30ms to 20.2s
SIZE
5m
4 to 20m
PRE-DELAY
OFF
OFF, 1 to 100ms
LIVENESS
196ms
30ms to 20.2s
ROLLOFF
2.4kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
PRE-DELAY
5ms
OFF, 1 to 100ms
EFFECT LVL
–2dB
–12 to +6dB
ROLLOFF
9.0kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
EFFECT LVL
+3dB
–12 to +6dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-9
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
CHURCH
MODE ADJUST
CATHEDRAL
MODE ADJUST
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
The CHURCH mode uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich,
smooth, reverberant decay characteristic of small and medium
listening spaces – such as churches and chambers – with long reverberation time relative to their sizes.
The CATHEDRAL mode is similar to the CHURCH listening mode. It
uses a reverb algorithm to emphasize the rich, smooth, reverberant
decay characteristic of large listening spaces – such as cathedrals –
with long reverberation time relative to their size.
The CHURCH mode is a superior room simulation listening mode
because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.
The CATHEDRAL mode is a superior room simulation listening
mode because it uses a proprietary reverb algorithm inherited from
Lexicon professional products.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER DEPTH
0 to 18
CENTER DEPTH
12
0 to 18
SPEECH DETECT
ON
ON, OFF
SPEECH DETECT
ON
ON, OFF
SIZE*
20m
4 to 30m
SIZE*
30m
4 to 30m
MID RT*
1.56s
24ms to 24.3s
MID RT*
3.72s
24ms to 24.3s
BASS RT*
1.87s
5ms to 48.6s
BASS RT*
4.47s
5ms to 48.6s
PRE-DELAY
24ms
OFF, 1 to 100ms
PRE-DELAY
23ms
OFF, 1 to 100ms
ROLLOFF
2.4kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
EFFECT LVL
–3dB
–12 to +6dB
EFFECT LVL
–8dB
–12 to +6dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full
parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-10
* BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameter settings are interdependent, meaning that the full
parameter range might not be available depending on the other parameter settings.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
PANORAMA
MODE ADJUST
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
PANORAMA
MODE ADJUST
The PANORAMA mode is designed for playback of stereo and
matrix-encoded sources. PANORAMA uses proprietary Lexicon
algorithms to move the stereo image outward from the front
speakers, producing a wider stereo field with greater depth.
Sound quality depends on proper location of the listening position
and front speakers. When the front speakers are positioned close to
either side of the display device, the effect is produced over a wider
area than when the front speakers are positioned at a large angle
from the display device.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EFFECT LVL
+4dB
–12 to +6dB
BASS CONTENT
STEREO
BINAURL, MONO, STEREO
PANORAMA
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SOURCE LEFT & RIGHT
SPEAKER ANGLE 30deg
LISTENER POS
+0
NOTE:
ENSURE THAT
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS
BEEN PROPERLY
PERFORMED
CALIBRATION
Select PANORAMA
CALIBRATION to open
the PANORAMA CALIBRATION menu shown
to the left, to calibrate the PANORAMA
listening mode. This listening mode must be
calibrated to take full advantage of its
effects.
For best results, you should center the
primary listening position between the front
left and right speakers as shown in the Center illustration at the top
of the next page. Otherwise, the PANORAMA listening mode will be
calibrated with varying results.
An external calibration source is required to calibrate the
PANORAMA listening mode. You should select a familiar stereo
source.
LOW FREQ WIDTH +0
–25 to +25dB
SURR ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
Parameter
Default Setting Possible Settings
INPUT BALANCE
<|>
L< to <|> to >R
SOURCE
LEFT & RIGHT
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT
CALIBRATION
Refer to next column
SPEAKER ANGLE
30deg
10 to 90deg
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
LISTENER POS
+0
-127 to +127
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-11
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
LEFT
CENTER
RIGHT
To calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode:
1. Remove all obstructions between the speakers and the primary
listening position.
2. Make sure the distances between the speakers and the primary
listening position are properly measured. To do this, select one
of the following options.
•
Select the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu DISTANCES option to
have the RV-5 automatically calibrate speaker distances.
•
Measure the distance between the primary listening position and the front baffle of each speaker. Then, set the corresponding SPEAKER DISTANCES menu parameters to the
closest available value.
3. Sit in the primary listening position. If the primary listening
position is not centered between the front left and right
speakers as shown in illustration B (above), set the PANORAMA
CALIBRATION
LISTENER POS parameter to compensate for
the difference using the remote control
and
arrow
6-12
buttons. Each increment within the –127 to +127 parameter
range represents about one-third of an inch. The Left illustration shows the left-of-center position. The Right illustration
shows the right- of-center position
4. Set the SOURCE parameter to RIGHT.
5. Begin playback of the external calibration source.
6. When playback of the external calibration source is in progress,
set the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter so the sound is not heard in
the right ear.
7. To confirm the LISTENER POS and SPEAKER ANGLE parameter
settings, set the SOURCE parameter to LEFT & RIGHT. If the
PANORAMA listening mode is properly calibrated, the sound
should be perceived to come from all around the primary
listening position. If not, go back to Step 1 and repeat the
calibration procedure.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
2-CH SURROUND
MONO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST
2-CH SURROUND
MONO LOGIC
This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left
channel to Front, Side and Rear Left channels and the right channel
to Front, Side and Rear Right channels, and sums the Left and Right
for the center. It is recommended for background music.
This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, uses proprietary
Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to
use all channels. This dramatically increases the perceived width
and sense of envelopment of the listening space.
Parameter
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
EFFECT LVL
–9dB
–12 to +6dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
ACADEMY FILTER
ON
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
2-CHANNEL
This mode, designed for playback of stereo sources, sends the left and
right channels to the Front L/R and Subwoofer channels. It is recommended for two-speaker playback with subwoofers and for
comparison purposes with other listening modes.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-13
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
MONO SURROUND
MODE ADJUST
5.1 L7 FILM
MONO SURROUND
MODE ADJUST
This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends the
mono source to all channels.
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
MONO
MODE ADJUST
MONO
This mode, designed for playback of mono sources, sends mono
sources to the center channel and subwoofer.
5.1
FILM
The 5.1 L7 FILM mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode
designed for playback of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded film
sources, and provides remarkable improvement compared to other
decoders.
It derives seven channels from 5.1-channel input sources with
enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are
present, the 5.1 L7 FILM listening mode also increases the perceived
length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
SURR ROLLOFF
7kHz
500HZ to 20kHz, OFF
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1ms to 30ms
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–10.0dB to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-14
Mode Adjust
RV-5
5.1 L7 TV
MODE ADJUST
5.1 L7 MUSIC
5.1
MODE ADJUST
TV
5.1
MUSIC
This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded broadcast sources. Based on the
5.1 L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 TV derives seven channels from
5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.
This proprietary Lexicon listening mode is designed for playback of
5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded music sources. Based on the 5.1
L7 FILM listening mode, 5.1 L7 MUSIC derives seven channels from
5.1-channel input sources with enhanced front steering.
Parameter
Possible Settings
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING FILM
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
5 SPKR ENHANCE ON
ON, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7kHz
500HZ to 20kHz, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7kHz
500HZ to 20kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1ms to 30ms
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1ms to 30ms
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–10.0dB to +0.0dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–10.0dB to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
Default Setting
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-15
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
5.1 PLIIx MOV
MODE ADJUST
5.1 PLIIx MOV
The 5.1 PLIIx MOV (MOVIE) listening mode is designed to play back
7.1 discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital film
sources. The seven main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,
often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of
up to 120Hz.
Note:
The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is only available when the front, side
and rear speakers are present.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
Refer to page 6-28
Refer to page 6-28
AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
–10.0 to +0.0dB
Note:
The RV-5RV-5 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.
The 5.1 PLIIx MOV mode will not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the
configuration.
Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode
The 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and
cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital film
sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote
control Mode buttons.
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 will
automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MOV listening mode if
this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital
source was present.
6-16
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
5.1 PLIIx MUS
MODE ADJUST
5.1 PLIIx MUS
The 5.1 PLIIx MUS (MUSIC) listening mode is designed to playback 7.1
discrete channels decoded from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital music
sources. The seven main channels are full–frequency. The .1 channel,
often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of
up to 120Hz.
Note:
The RV-5 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in
non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources.
Activating the 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode
The 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode is a dynamic listening mode and
cannot be assigned as a preferred listening mode for Dolby Digital
sources. To activate this listening mode, use the front-panel or remote
control Mode buttons.
Note:
The 5.1 PLIIx MUS mode does not appear in the list of available listening
modes if either the side or rear speakers are missing from the configuration.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
Refer to page 6-28
Refer to page 6-28
AUTO, ON, OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
–10.0 to +0.0dB
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
When the DOLBY D parameter is set to USE LAST, the RV-5 will
automatically activate the dynamic 5.1 PLIIx MUS listening mode if
this listening mode was activated the last time a Dolby Digital
source was present.
6-17
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
DOLBY DIGITAL & DOLBY DIGITAL EX
MODE ADJUST
DIGITAL
OR
DIGITAL EX
These listening modes are designed to decode and play back 5.1
discrete channels from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. The five
main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel, often referred to
as LFE information, has a limited frequency range of 120Hz.
The mode name differs, depending on the encoding present in the
input source, the EX DECODING parameter setting and the speaker
setup.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is recommended for Dolby
Digital sources recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX
encoding. This listening mode can also be used with other types
of 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources with mixed results. The table
at the bottom of the page shows the conditions for the behavior
of the Dolby Digital EX mode when activated.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when both the
side and rear speakers are present and Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is activated. Matrix decoding is then applied to derive a
surround back channel from the other surround channels.
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is activated when the EX
DECODING parameter is set to ON or AUTO and a flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoding is detected.
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is not activated when the
EX DECODING parameter is set to OFF or AUTO and a nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or
without Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EX DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
Note:
The RV-5 cannot detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in nonflagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input sources because they do not
include information in the input signal that identifies Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoding.
Input Source
Parameter Setting
5.1-Channel Dolby Digital
5.1-Channel Surround EX
(Flagged)
5.1-Channel Surround EX
(Non-Flagged)
EX DECODING: AUTO
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL
EX DECODING: ON
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
DOLBY DIGITAL EX
EX DECODING: OFF
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
DOLBY DIGITAL
6-18
Mode Adjust
RV-5
5.1 2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO LOGIC
MODE ADJUST
5.1 2-CHANNEL
This mode, recommended for recording purposes, is designed for
converting 5.1-channel Dolby Digital-encoded input sources into
2-channel Logic 7-encoded output signals.
The downmixed 5.1-channel Dolby Digital input signals are sent to
the Front L/R speakers and subwoofer.
5.1 MONO LOGIC
This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded
mono sources, uses proprietary Lexicon reverb algorithms to realistically expand mono sources to use all channels. This dramatically
increases the perceived width and sense of envelopment of the
listening space.
Note that:
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER MIX
+0dB
–25 to +5dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
–5 to +5dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0
–127 to +127
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
–5 to +5dB
COMPRESSION
OFF
AUTO, ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–20.0 to +0.0dB
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
When a 1.0 Dolby Digital source is present, the RV-5 automatically
activates the 5.1 MONO LOGIC listening mode.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
EFFECT LVL
–9dB
–12 to +6dB
ACADEMY FILTER
ON
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-19
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
5.1 MONO SURR
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO
MODE ADJUST
5.1 MONO SURR
This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded
mono sources, sends mono signals to all channels.
5.1 MONO
This listening mode, designed for playback of Dolby Digital-encoded
mono sources, sends mono signals to the center channel and
subwoofer.
Parameter
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-20
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
DTS-ES DECODING
The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening modes are designed
for, at a minimum, playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel
matrix-encoded DTS-ES and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES
sources.
The DTS, DTS-ES, and DTS-ES Discr listening mode names differ
depending on the encoding present in the input source, the
DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.
DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is
activated. The table at the bottom of the page shows the conditions
for the behavior of DTS-ES decoding when it is activated.
•
DTS-ES decoding is activated when both the side and rear
speakers are present and the ES DECODING parameter is set to
ON or AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or a
6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is detected.
•
DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when the ES DECODING
parameter is set to OFF or when the ES DECODING parameter
is set to AUTO and a 5.1-channel DTS source is detected.
•
DTS-ES Discr mode decodes 6.1-channel discrete-encoded
DTS-ES sources when ES decoding is set to AUTO or ON in the
MODE ADJUST menu. The mode appears in the Setup menu
when a DTS 6.1 source is present and seven speakers are
selected in the SPEAKER SETUP menu.
Note:
The table below is not applicable to the DTS-ES THX, DTS THX ULTRA2
and DTS THX MUSIC listening modes. These listening modes will be
explained in greater detail later in this manual.
Input Source
5.1-Channel DTS
5.1-Channel
Matrix-Encoded DTS-ES
6.1-Channel
Discrete-Encoded DTS-ES
DTS
DTS-ES
DTS-ES
ES DECODING: ON
DTS-ES
DTS-ES
DTS-ES
ES DECODING: OFF
DTS
DTS
DTS
Parameter Setting
ES DECODING: AUTO
6-21
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
DTS-ES L7 FILM & DTS L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
FILM OR
DTS-ES L7 MUSIC & DTS L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
FILM
MUSIC OR
MUSIC
These proprietary Lexicon listening modes use an advanced matrix to
decode seven channels from 5.1- and 6.1-channel film sources with
enhanced front steering. When both side and rear speakers are
present, the DTS-ES L7 FILM listening mode also increases the
perceived length and sense of envelopment of the listening space.
These proprietary Lexicon listening modes, similar to the DTS-ES
L7 FILM listening mode, use an advanced matrix to decode seven
c h a n n e l s f r o m 5 . 1 a n d 6 . 1 - c h a n n e l m u s i c s o u rc e s w i t h
e n h a n c e d f r o n t s t e e r i n g t o p r o v i d e remarkable sound
improvement compared to other decoders.
The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel
DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or 6.1-channel discreteencoded DTS-ES film sources. The listening mode name differs,
depending on the encoding present in the input source, the ES
DECODING parameter setting and the speaker setup.
The listening modes are designed for enhanced playback of
5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES, or
6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES music sources. The
listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the ES DECODING parameter
setting and the speaker setups.
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
SOUND STAGE
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
ON, OFF
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
SURR ROLLOFF
7kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
SURR ROLLOFF
7kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
ES DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–10.0 to +0.0dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
ES DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-22
Mode Adjust
RV-5
DTS, DTS-ES & DTS(-ES) Discr
MODE ADJUST
OR
OR
DTS 2-CHAN & DTS-ES 2-CHAN
Discr
This mode decodes 5.1 matrix or 6.1 discrete channels from DTS-ES
sources. It is designed for playback of 5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel
matrix-encoded DTS-ES, and 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES
sources.
The six decoded main channels are full-frequency. The .1 channel,
often referred to as LFE information, has a limited frequency range
of 120Hz.
The listening mode name differs, depending on the encoding
present in the input source, the DECODING parameter setting, and
the speaker setup. Refer to page 6-21 for more information.
MODE ADJUST
2-CHAN OR
2-CHAN
These modes, recommended for recording purposes, send
downmixed 5.1-channel or 6.1-channel DTS-ES input signals to the
front speakers and subwoofer as 2-channel Logic 7-encoded output
signals.
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER MIX
+0dB
–25 to +5dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
–5 to +5dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0
–127 to +127
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
–5 to +5dB
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–20.0 to +0.0dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
–10.0 to +0.0dB
ES DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
ES DECODING
AUTO
AUTO, ON, OFF
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-23
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
5.1a L7 FILM
MODE ADJUST
5.1
5.1a L7 MUSIC
MODE ADJUST
FILM
The 5.1a LOGIC7 FILM listening mode is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode that uses LOGIC7 decoding to derive seven channels
from 5.1-channel analog film sources with enhanced front steering.
This listening mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass
management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and
audio controls (tone controls).
5.1a
MUSIC
The 5.1a LOGIC7 MUSIC listening mode is similar to the 5.1a
LOGIC7 FILM listening mode, but specifically tailored for music
sources. This mode is designed and recommended for playback of
5.1-channel analog music sources.
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
Option/Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE
+0.0dB
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
RE-EQUALIZER
OFF
ON, OFF
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
ON, OFF
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
SOUND STAGE
REAR
REAR, NEUTRAL, FRONT
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
ON, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7kHz
500Hz to 20kHz, OFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OFF, 1 to 30ms
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-10.0 to +0.0dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-24
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
MODE ADJUST
5.1a STANDARD
This mode allows 5.1-channel analog sources to use bass
management, speaker crossovers, speaker distance calibration, and
audio controls (tone controls). When these features are not used,
the 5.1a STANDARD listening mode is similar to the 5.1a BYPASS
listening mode. The 5.1a STANDARD mode sends identical signals
(with appropriate time delays) to the Main Zone audio output
connectors labeled Side L and Rear as well as Side R and Rear R.
Parameter
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
This mode downmixes 5.1-channel analog input signals into
2-channel LOGIC7-encoded output signals. It sends these signals to
the front speakers and the subwoofer. It is recommended for
recording purposes, particularly for recording from a DVD-A or
multi-channel SACD player to a CD-R or another 2-channel recording format.
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER MIX
+0dB
-25 to +5dB
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
CNTR DLY SAMPLES +0
-127 to +127
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
-5 to +5dB
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
-20.0 to +0.0dB
SUB L/R LVL
+0dB
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
6-25
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
5.1a BYPASS
MODE ADJUST
2CH BYPASS
MODE ADJUST
5.1a BYPASS
•
Designed for playback of 5.1-channel analog sources, such as
DVD-A or SACD players.
•
Sends the 5.1-channel analog audio input connector directly to
the Main Zone volume control and audio output connectors, as
shown on pages 2-9 and 3-59. These signals receive no internal
processing.
•
•
When both side and rear speakers are present, surround
channel signals are sent in parallel to the side and rear speakers.
To configure a 5-channel speaker setup, set the OUTPUT
LEVELS menu SIDE L/R or REAR L/R parameter to OFF to
deactivate the associated surround speakers.
Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/AGE2/A BYP then
2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS
parameter between ON and OFF.
2CH BYPASS
This listening mode sends 2-channel analog audio input signals to
the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Front L/R with no
internal processing.
The 2CH BYPASS listening mode is automatically activated
whenever a 2-channel analog source is present and the MAIN ADV
menu ANALOG BYPASS parameter is set to ON. The 2CH BYPASS
listening mode is not available when a digital source is present and
the MAIN ADV menu INPUT SELECT parameter is set to AUTO.
Pressing the remote control HOME/MAIN/PAGE2/A BYP button then
2CH buttons toggles the MAIN ADV menu ANALOG BYPASS
parameter between ON and OFF.
Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio controls (tone) are
not available when the 2CH BYPASS listening mode is activated.
Parameter
Default Setting
OUTPUT LEVELS
Refer to page 6-28
CUSTOM
Refer to page 6-28
Possible Settings
Note:
Speaker crossover settings, speaker distances and audio (tone) controls
are not available when the 5.1a BYPASS listening mode is activated.
6-26
Mode Adjust
RV-5
HEADPHONE L7
MODE ADJUST
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE L7 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of 2-channel sources through headphones.
This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing and Head Related
Transfer Functions to realistically increase the perceived sense of
envelopment when listening through headphones.
The HEADPHONE listening mode is recommended for 2-channel
sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the
HEADPHONE listening mode are available.
HEADPHONE DTS
MODE ADJUST
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE DTS is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of DTS(-ES)-encoded music or film sources
through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing
and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the
perceived sense of envelopment when listening through
headphones.
The HEADPHONE DTS listening mode is recommended for DTSencoded sources when listening through headphones. No parameters for the HEADPHONE DTS listening mode are available.
HEADPHONE 5.1
MODE ADJUST
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE 5.1a
MODE ADJUST
HEADPHONE 5.1 is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of Dolby Digital-encoded music or film
sources through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7
processing and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically
increase the perceived sense of envelopment when listening
through headphones.
The HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode is recommended for Dolby
Digital-encoded sources when listening through headphones. No
parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1 listening mode are available.
HEADPHONE 5.1a
HEADPHONE 5.1a is a proprietary Lexicon listening mode designed
for enhanced playback of 5.1-channel analog music or film sources
through headphones. This listening mode uses LOGIC7 processing
and Head Related Transfer Functions to realistically increase the
perceived sense of envelopment when listening through
headphones.
The HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode is recommended for
5.1-channel analog sources when listening through headphones.
No parameters for the HEADPHONE 5.1a listening mode are
available.
6-27
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
OUTPUT LEVELS
MODE ADJUST
CUSTOM VS PRESET
Listening Mode
OUTPUT LEVELS
MODE ADJUST
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is
used to adjust output levels for the Main
Zone audio output connectors labeled
Center, Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R.
OUTPUT LEVELS
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
The OUTPUT LEVELS option does not appear on listening mode
menus when the selected listening mode does not accommodate
multichannel output signals. Instead, an output-specific parameter
appears. For example, the MONO listening mode menu includes a
SUB LVL parameter.
(Listening Mode)
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
Allows comparison listening between the custom and factory-default
versions of the selected listening mode. When PRESET is selected, the
listening mode is heard in its factory-default condition, as if all listening
mode menu parameters were set to their factory-default settings.
When CUSTOM is selected, the listening mode is heard in its custom
condition, including all current listening mode menu parameter settings.
The PRESET and CUSTOM versions of the selected listening mode will
sound identical when all listening mode menu parameters are set to
their factory-default settings.
Note:
Parameter
Default Setting
Possible Settings
CENTER
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
SIDE L/R
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
REAR L/R
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
SUB
+0dB
OFF, –30 to +12dB
See “Listening Mode Menu Option and Parameter Descriptions” on page 6-30 for
detailed descriptions.
CUSTOM
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
CUSTOM
Opens the CUSTOM menu, which can be used to compare custom
and factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to
restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode.
The CUSTOM VS PRESET option does not affect current listening mode
menu parameter settings.
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE
PRESET
CUSTOM
To toggle between the custom and factory-default versions of
the selected listening mode:
1. Follow the CUSTOM VS PRESET menu path to open the CUSTOM VS PRESET drop-down menu.
2. When the CUSTOM VS PRESET option drop-down menu is
open, press the remote control
and
arrow buttons to
toggle between the PRESET (factory-default) and CUSTOM
versions of the selected listening mode.
3. When finished, press the
arrow button to close the CUSTOM
VS PRESET drop-down menu.
6-28
Mode Adjust
RV-5
RESET MODE
MODE ADJUST
(Listening Mode)
CUSTOM
RESET MODE
Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factory default
settings.
To restore the factory-default version of the selected listening mode:
1. Follow the RESET MODE menu path to select the RESET MODE
option. The PRESS RIGHT V TO RESTORE MODE message
appears in the on-screen display.
CUSTOM
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE
PRESS RIGHT V
TO RESTORE MODE
2. Press the
arrow button to restore the factory-default version of
the selected listening mode. Press the
arrow button to close the
message without restoring the factory-default.
Note:
When the CUSTOM menu RESET MODE option is selected to restore the
factory-default version of the selected listening mode, the corresponding TRIGGER SETUP menu listening mode parameter is
automatically set to OFF.
6-29
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON, OFF
Simulates 7-channel playback in 5-channel speaker configurations.
When set to ON, the RV-5 provides an increased sense of
spaciousness and envelopment through the surround speakers. This
enhancement is most noticeable when the surround speakers are
positioned to the side of the primary listening position, or when the
primary listening position is located against the rear wall. The effectiveness of this parameter varies within the listening space. For best
results, it is recommended that you position the surround speakers
to the left and right sides of the primary listening position.
ACADEMY FILTER
ON, OFF
When set to ON, restores the proper tonal balance of older mono
film sources that have much narrower frequency responses than
more recent mono film sources.
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON, OFF
Maximizes matrix steering accuracy. When set to ON, the RV-5
continually monitors the 2-channel input signal and automatically
adjusts the relative level and time offset of the input channels to
ensure that signals are sent to the appropriate channels with
maximum separation. When set to OFF, the accuracy of the selected
listening mode varies among sources. It is recommended that you
set this parameter to ON for film and broadcast sources and to OFF
for music sources.
BASS CONTENT
BINAURAL, MONO, STEREO
Adjusts the bass content of binaural, mono and stereo recordings.
When set to BINAURL, the RV-5 activates low-frequency compensation. Select this setting for true binaural sources recorded with
dummy head microphones. Select the MONO setting for sources
recorded with mono bass. Select the STEREO setting for sources
recorded with stereo bass.
6-30
BASS ENHANCE
ON, OFF
Enhances stereo bass, which results in low-frequency reproduction
that is less localizable and more realistic in the listening space. The
effectiveness of the BASS ENHANCE parameter varies, depending
on room acoustics and the ability of the surround speakers to
reproduce low frequencies. It is recommended that you use front,
side or rear speakers that are capable of reproducing frequencies of
40Hz or lower.
BASS RT
5ms to 48.6s
Works with the MID RT and SIZE parameters to adjust the amount
of time required for low-frequency information to decay below 60dB
in level. The BASS RT parameter setting should match the MID RT
parameter setting for more natural effects in smaller listening spaces.
CAUTION!
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
BASS XOVER
30Hz to 19.9kHz, OFF
Sets the frequency to which BASS RT applies.
CALIBRATION
Opens the PANORAMA listening mode CALIBRATION menu, which
is used to calibrate the PANORAMA listening mode. Refer to
“PANORAMA” on page 6-11 for more information.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
CENTER
OFF, –30 to +12dB
Controls the output level of the audio output connector labeled Center.
Available in all except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS,
DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL), MONO, 5.1 MONO and LIVE!
modes.
CENTER DEPTH
0 to 18
Adjusts the amount of processing applied to the center channel,
changing the perceived distance of the center speaker. Higher
settings increase and lower settings decrease the perceived distance
of the center speaker from the listening position. Available in
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.
CENTER MIX
–25 to +5dB
Indicates the relative center channel level for downmixing. Set this
parameter to +0dB for film sources and –5dB for music sources.
Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
–127 to +127
Controls the relative time offset of the center channel. Set this
parameter to +0 unless the center channel is not properly timed
and the value of the error is known. Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and
DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.
COMPRESSION
AUTO, ON, OFF
Reduces wide volume level changes and increases dialogue intelligibility at lower listening levels for Dolby Digital input sources. When
ON, full compression is applied, regardless of volume level. When OFF,
compression is not applied. Set this parameter to AUTO or ON for
Dolby Digital input sources that are listened to at lower volume levels,
(continued)
especially for nighttime viewing to avoid disturbing others. Available in
all Dolby Digital modes.
CTR WIDTH
MIN, 1 to 6, MAX
Adjusts the center image. When set to MIN, the center image is heard
from just the center speaker. When set to MAX, the center image is
heard as a “phantom” center image from the front left and right
speakers. When set on the 1 to 6 scale, the center image is heard in
various combinations of the front and center speakers. Available in
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
CUSTOM
Opens the CUSTOM menu, which is used to compare custom and
factory-default versions of the selected listening mode and to restore
the factory default version of the selected listening mode. Available in
all modes.
CUSTOM VS PRESET
Allows comparison listening to the custom and factory-default versions
of the selected listening mode. Refer to page 5-32 for information.
Available in all modes.
DIMENSION
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
Controls the relative balance of the sound field, which can be useful
with certain recordings to achieve a more suitable balance among
all speakers. When set to FRONT, the sound field is balanced toward
the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, the sound
field is balanced at the center of the listening space. When set to
REAR, the sound field is balanced toward the rear of the listening
space. Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
6-31
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
EARLY RFLX LVL
–80dB to +12dB, OFF
Controls the amount of additional early reflections. Available in all
LIVE! modes.
This parameter is available in all DTS modes.
EFFECT LVL
EX DECODING
–12 to +6dB
Adjusts the amount of effect applied to the listening mode. Available
in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA,
MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC modes.
ES DECODING
AUTO, ON, OFF
Controls DTS-ES decoding, which extracts a rear channel from
5.1-channel DTS, 5.1-channel matrix-encoded DTS-ES and
6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES sources. When ON is
selected, DTS-ES decoding is activated for all DTS-ES sources. When
OFF is selected, DTS-ES decoding is deactivated for all DTS-ES sources.
DTS-ES decoding is activated when AUTO is selected and a 5.1-channel
matrix-encoded or a 6.1-channel discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is
detected. DTS-ES decoding is deactivated when a 5.1-channel DTS
source is detected.
DTS-ES listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding is
engaged. DTS listening modes are available when DTS-ES decoding
is not engaged. Refer to the DTS-ES Decoding section that begins
on page 5-25 for more information.
Note the following:
•
DTS-ES decoding cannot be engaged unless both side and rear
speakers are present.
•
The DTS-ES STATUS menu includes an SB level meter when the
ES DECODING parameter is set to ON and a 5.1-channel DTS
source is present or when the ES DECODING parameter is set to
AUTO and a 5.1-channel matrix-encoded or 6.1-channel
6-32
discrete-encoded DTS-ES source is present.
AUTO, ON, OFF
Controls Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding, which extracts a rear
channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources recorded with or
without Dolby Digital Surround EX. When ON, Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources. When OFF, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is disengaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources.
When AUTO is selected, Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding is
engaged when a flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded
with Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding is detected. Dolby Digital
Surround EX decoding is not engaged when a non- flagged
5.1-channel Dolby Digital source recorded with or without Dolby
Digital Surround EX encoding is detected.
Note:
The RV-5 cannot automatically detect Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding
in non-flagged 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. A non-flagged input
source does not identify Dolby Digital Surround EX encoding in the input
signal.
The Dolby DIGITAL EX listening mode is available when Dolby
Digital Surround EX decoding is engaged. The Dolby DIGITAL
listening mode is available when Dolby Digital Surround EX
decoding is not engaged. Refer to the Dolby DIGITAL EX & Dolby
DIGITAL listening mode descriptions that begin on page 5-22 for
more information.
Note the following:
•
Dolby Digital Surround EX decoding cannot be engaged unless
both side and rear speakers are present.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
•
This parameter is available in 5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS,
DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL modes.
•
When the Shift command bank is activated, pressing the
remote control DOLBY button while a 5.1-channel Dolby
Digital source is present activates the Dolby DIGITAL EX or
Dolby DIGITAL listening mode. Subsequent presses adjust the
EX DECODING parameter, cycling through the AUTO, ON and
OFF settings.
(continued)
Careful adjustment of this parameter allows achievement of proper
tonal balance and reduces the risk of subwoofer overload. When the
speaker setup does not include a subwoofer, LFE information is mixed
into speakers for which the corresponding CUSTOM SETUP menu
parameter is set to FULL or to the lowest crossover points. Available in
all Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1
MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO) and all DTS modes.
LISTENER POS
FRONT STEERING
OFF, MSURR, MUSIC, FILM
Adjusts front steering between the front left, front right, and center
speakers. When set to FILM, maximum front steering is applied to
the center channel. When set to MUSIC, moderate front steering is
applied. When set to MSURR, minimum front steering is applied.
When set to OFF, no front steering is applied. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to FILM for film and broadcast sources
and to MUSIC, MSURR or OFF for music sources. Available in L7 TV,
L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes.
INPUT BALANCE
L< to <|> to >R
Controls the balance of the selected stereo analog audio input
connectors, compensating for audio input sources with audible
channel imbalance. Available in PANORAMA mode.
LFE MIX
–20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB
Controls the output level of LFE information – the .1 channel in a 5.1or 6.1-channel input source – that is sent to the audio output labeled
Subwoofer. Low frequencies from up to seven other channels might be
combined with the LFE information to create the subwoofer output
signal, which significantly increases subwoofer output levels.
–127 to +127
Compensates for primary listening positions that are not centered
between the front left and right speakers. Each increment within the
–127 to +127 parameter range represents about one-third of an inch.
Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 5-13 for more
information. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION mode.
Note:
The LISTENER POS parameter range might extend past the location of the
front left and right speakers.
LIVENESS
30ms to 20.2s
Depends on the SIZE parameter setting. The LIVENESS parameter
adjusts the amount of effect recirculation. Higher settings mimic
more reflective surfaces and increase decay time. Available in
NIGHTCLUB and CONCERT HALL modes.
LOW FREQ WIDTH
–25 to +25dB
Applies low-frequency spatial correction to the input signal. This
correction is applied to uncorrelated input signals below 60Hz.
Available in PANORAMA mode.
6-33
Mode Adjust
MASTER LEVEL
Lexicon
–5 to +5dB
Adjusts the output level of 2-channel Logic 7-encoded sources.
Available in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN modes.
MID RT
24ms to 24.3s
Works with the SIZE parameters to adjust the amount of time
required for mid-frequency information to decay below 60dB in
level. The full parameter range might not be available depending
on the SIZE parameter setting. Available in CHURCH, CATHEDRAL
and all LIVE! modes.
CAUTION!
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT or SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
Note:
The PANORAMA parameter within the Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx
MUSIC listening modes should not be confused with the separate
PANORAMA listening mode (page 6-11).
PRE-DELAY
1 to 100ms, OFF
Adjusts delay time between the direct sound and the onset of reverberation. Higher settings make the simulated space sound larger.
Because some pre-delay is inherent in all source material, you
should begin with the parameter set to the lowest setting, then
make adjustments accordingly. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT
HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.
RE-EQUALIZER
ON, OFF
Opens the OUTPUT LEVELS menu, which is used to adjust output
levels for the Main Zone audio output connectors labeled Center,
Subwoofer, Side L/R and Rear L/R. Refer to page 5-32 for more
information. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1
2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and
LIVE! modes.
Simulates high-frequency rolloffs that occur in movie theaters.
When set to ON, the RV-5 applies a high-frequency filter. When set
to OFF, the RV-5 does not apply a high-frequency filter. It is recommended that you set this parameter to ON for film sources, as many
films are mixed for movie theaters and might sound too bright
when played back in home theaters without re-equalization.
Available in L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1
L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS (-ES) L7 FILM,
DTS(-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS(-ES) THX modes.
PANORAMA
REAR DLY OFFSET
OUTPUT LEVELS
ON, OFF
When set to ON, Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC listening
modes extend the front stereo image to include surround channel
signals, which creates a “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.
Available in Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC modes.
6-34
OFF, 1 to 30ms
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the
arrival time of rear speaker signals. It is recommended that you
increase the setting when using side and rear speakers that are
located close together or when a greater sense of depth is desired in
the listening space. Available in all Logic 7 modes and PANORAMA
mode.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
REAR L/R
–30 to +12dB, OFF
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Rear L/R. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1
2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and
LIVE! modes.
(continued)
SIDE L/R
Controls the level of the Side L/R audio output connectors in the Main
Zone. Available in all except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL,
5.1 MONO, DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes.
SIZE
RESET MODE
–30 to +12dB, OFF
4 to 20 or 30m
Restores the factory-default version of the selected listening mode,
restoring all listening mode menu parameters to their factorydefault settings. Available in all modes.
Adjusts the length of the listening space within a 4m to 20m or
30m range (depending on the listening mode). Increase the size of
the space to increase the reverb effect. Available in NIGHTCLUB,
CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.
REVERB LVL
CAUTION!
–80 to +0dB, OFF
Controls the amount of added reverb. Available in all LIVE! modes.
ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
Simulates the absorption of high frequencies in a real space. It is
recommended that you begin with a low setting to simulate highfrequency absorptive spaces. Available in NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT
HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes.
SHAPE
0 TO 4
Controls the buildup of the energy that most audibly creates the
sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together – if either is
set to zero, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.
Setting the BASS RT, MID RT and SIZE parameters to a high
value may produce undesirable or damaging audio.
SOUND STAGE
FRONT, NEUTRAL, REAR
Dynamically controls the relative balance of the audio output
connectors. When set to FRONT, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels
are attenuated by 6dB, shifting the perceived balance of the sound
field to the front of the listening space. When set to NEUTRAL, Side L/R
and Rear L/R output levels are slightly attenuated by 3dB, shifting the
perceived balance of the sound field to the center of the listening
space. When set to REAR, Side L/R and Rear L/R output levels are not
attenuated, preserving the intended balance of the sound field.
Available in all Logic 7 modes.
6-35
Mode Adjust
SOURCE
Lexicon
RIGHT, LEFT & RIGHT, LEFT
Controls the perceived direction of the PANORAMA listening mode
external calibration source signal. When RIGHT is selected, the
sound is perceived to come from the right of the primary listening
position. When LEFT is selected, the sound is perceived to come
from the left of the primary listening position. When LEFT & RIGHT
is selected, the sound is perceived to come from all around the
primary listening position. Refer to the Calibration section that
begins on page 6-11 for more information about the SOURCE
parameter. Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.
Note:
The SOURCE parameter controls the perceived direction of the sound,
although both the front left and right speakers generate the external
calibration source signal.
SPEAKER ANGLE
10 to 90deg
Compensates for a wide or narrow speaker angle relative to the
primary listening position. Select the setting closest to the angle
between the front left and right speakers and the primary listening
position. Refer to the Calibration section that begins on page 6-11
for more information about the SPEAKER ANGLE parameter.
Available in PANORAMA CALIBRATION.
SPEECH DETECT
ON, OFF
Distinguishes monaural speech from other input sources. When set to
ON, effects are lowered to minimize interference and unnatural echo
in monaural speech. When stereo input sources are present, the front
left and right channels are independently used as inputs for ambience
synthesis. When strong monaural speech is present in the input source,
the monaural component of the ambience effect is reduced and the
stereo component of the effect is increased. When set to OFF, the
amount of ambience synthesis is dynamically controlled. Available in
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL modes.
6-36
SPREAD
0 to 100%
Controls the timing between the initial reflections that most audibly
create the sound of a real room. SHAPE and SPREAD work together; if
either is set to 0, the other has no effect. Available in all LIVE! modes.
SUB & SUB LVL
OFF, –30 to +12dB
Controls the output level of the Main Zone audio output connector
labeled Subwoofer. The SUB parameter appears on the listening
mode OUTPUT LEVELS menu. The SUB LVL parameter appears on
listening mode menus when the listening mode does not accommodate multichannel output signals. Available in all except LIVE!
modes.
SURR ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
Applies high-frequency attenuation control to the audio output
connectors labeled Side L/R and Rear L/R. This filter is only applied to
output signals generated by the RV-5. Available in all Logic 7 modes.
SURROUND DLY
0 to 15ms
Increases the perceived depth of the listening space by delaying the
arrival time of signals from the side and rear speakers. It is recommended that you increase the setting when a greater sense of
depth is desired in the listening space.
SURROUND EX
AUTO, ON, OFF
Controls the THX Surround EX decoding feature, which can be used to
extract a rear channel from 5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When
ON is selected, THX Surround EX decoding is engaged for all
5.1-channel Dolby Digital sources. When OFF is selected, THX
Surround EX decoding is not engaged for all 5.1-channel Dolby Digital
sources. Available in THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX and THX modes.
Mode Adjust
RV-5
LISTENING MODE MENU OPTION and PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
SURROUND MIX
(continued)
-5 to +5dB
Controls the relative level of surround channel information sent to the
audio output connectors labeled Front L/R. It is recommended that
you set this parameter to +2dB or +3dB for all input sources. Available
in 5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS (-ES) 2-CHAN modes.
TREB CUT RT
500Hz to 20kHz
Sets the frequency above which high frequencies are rolled off in
the reverberated signal, causing reverberated signals to grow
progressively darker. This results in a more natural sound because it
simulates the effect of air absorption in a real hall. Setting this
parameter to a low frequency dampens the audio as it re-circulates,
and consequently can actually shorten the reverb time. Available in
all LIVE! modes.
VOCAL ENHANCE
+6.0dB, +3.0dB, +0.0dB
Controls the level of dialog-boost in the audio output connector
labeled Center. Increase this setting to improve dialog intelligibility,
particularly at lower volume levels. Available in all Logic 7 modes.
6-37
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
MODE – PARAMETER RELATIONSHIPS
The following table lists each parameter and the modes in which it is used.
The parameter...
Is used in these modes
5 SPKR ENHANCE
All L7 modes
ACADEMY FILTER
MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC
AUTO AZIMUTH
L7 FILM and L7 TV
BASS CONTENT
PANORAMA
BASS ENHANCE
All L7 modes
BASS RT
CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes
CALIBRATION
PANORAMA
CENTER
All except 2 CH modes (2-CHANNEL, 2 CH BYPASS, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 MONO and
LIVE! modes)
CENTER DEPTH
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL
CENTER MIX
5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN
COMPRESSION
All Dolby Digital modes
CTR WIDTH
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
CUSTOM
All modes
CUSTOM VS PRESET
All modes
DIMENSION
Dolby DPLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
EARLY RFLX LVL
All LIVE! modes
EFFECT LVL
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL, PANORAMA, MONO LOGIC and 5.1 MONO LOGIC
ES DECODING
All DTS modes
6-38
Mode Adjust
RV-5
The parameter...
Is used in these modes
EX DECODING
5.1 PLIIx MOV, 5.1 PLIIx MUS, DOLBY DIGITAL EX and DOLBY DIGITAL
FRONT STEERING
L7 TV, L7 MUSIC, L7 MUSIC SURR, all 5.1 L7 modes and all DTS L7 modes
INPUT BALANCE
PANORAMA
LFE MIX
All Dolby Digital modes except MONO modes (5.1 MONO LOGIC, 5.1 MONO SURR, 5.1 MONO), all DTS modes
and 5.1a BYPASS
LISTENER POS
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
LIVENESS
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL
LOW FREQ WIDTH
PANORAMA
MASTER LEVEL
5.1 2-CHANNEL, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN
MID RT
CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes
OUTPUT LEVELS
All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes
PANORAMA
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
PRE-DELAY
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes
RE-EQUALIZER
L7 FILM, L7 TV, Dolby PLII + THX, Dolby PLIIx + THX, 5.1 L7 FILM, 5.1 L7 TV, THX ULTRA2, THX SurEX, THX, DTS
(-ES) L7 FILM, DTS (-ES) THX ULTRA2 and DTS (-ES) THX
REAR DLY OFFSET
All L7 modes and PANORAMA
REAR L/R
All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes
RESET MODE
All modes
REVERB LVL
All LIVE! modes
ROLLOFF
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes
SHAPE
All LIVE! modes
SIDE L/R
All except 2-CHANNEL, MONO, 5.1 2-CHANNEL, 5.1 MONO, DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN, 2CH BYPASS and LIVE! modes
SIZE
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH, CATHEDRAL and all LIVE! modes
6-39
Mode Adjust
Lexicon
The parameter...
Is used in these modes
SOUND STAGE
All L7 modes
SOURCE
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SPEAKER ANGLE
PANORAMA CALIBRATION
SPEECH DETECT
NIGHTCLUB, CONCERT HALL, CHURCH and CATHEDRAL
SPREAD
All LIVE! modes
SUB & SUB LVL
All except LIVE! modes
SURR ROLLOFF
All L7 modes
SURROUND DLY
Dolby PLII MUSIC and Dolby PLIIx MUSIC
SURROUND MIX
5.1 2-CHANNEL and DTS(-ES) 2-CHAN
TREB CUT RT
All LIVE! modes
VOCAL ENHANCE
All L7 modes
6-40
7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting..........................................................................7-2
Routine Maintenance ..................................................................7-4
Restoring Factory-Default Settings...............................................7-4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Lexicon
TROUBLESHOOTING
The RV-5 does not power on.
1. Make sure the rear-panel power switch is set to the | (“on”)
position.
2. Attempt to power on the RV-5 with the front-panel Standby
button and remote control On button.
3. Examine the power cord to ensure a good connection between
the rear-panel AC input connector and the wall outlet.
front-panel displays when audio has been muted. To deactivate
mute, press the Mute button or adjust the volume level.
3. Check the INPUT SETUP menu DIGITAL IN and ANALOG IN
parameters to ensure the appropriate audio connector is assigned
to the selected input.
4. Make sure the RV-5 is receiving an audio signal. To do this,
follow the instructions that begin on page 2-29 to open the
STATUS menu for the current input source.
4. Check the electrical circuit and breaker.
Dialogue sounds muffled.
The remote control does not work.
1. Eliminate obstructions between the remote control and the
front-panel IR receiver. When the RV-5 is not using the rearpanel IR IN connector, the remote control must be in line of
sight with the front-panel IR receiver for proper operation. The
remote control might also become unreliable if strong sunlight
or fluorescent light is shining on the IR receiver.
2. Make sure the remote control batteries are correctly inserted
with the proper polarity (page 1-6).
3. Replace the remote control batteries. When the batteries are
low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage
condition that prevents it from operating the RV-8.
The RV-5 is powered on, but there is no audio.
1. Make sure volume level is audible. Volume level can be
increased with the front-panel volume knob or the remote
control VOL
and
buttons.
2. Make sure audio has not been muted. The message “MUTE
ON” or “FULL MUTE ON” will appear in the on-screen and
7-2
If the speaker setup does not include a center speaker, make sure a
custom – as opposed to a THX – speaker setup is selected. Then,
make sure the CUSTOM SETUP menu CENTER parameter is set to
NONE (page 3-31).
A humming sound is present in the audio.
1. If a cable TV connection is present, disconnect the cable from
the wall outlet. If this eliminates the humming sound, a ground
loop isolation device is required. Contact your dealer or the
cable provider for assistance.
2. Disconnect components one at a time to isolate the problem.
Once the problem is identified, make sure the associated
component is properly grounded and connected to the same
electrical circuit as the RV-5.
The RV-5 is powered on, but there is no video.
1. Examine the video cables – particularly the S-Video cables –
to ensure a good connection to the associated component.
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
RV-5
2. Check the INPUT SETUP menu VIDEO IN and COMPONENT IN
(page 3-11) parameters to ensure the appropriate video
connector is assigned to the selected input.
RF interference is present in the audio or video.
1. Make sure the RV-5 is not positioned near unshielded TV or FM
antennas, cable TV decoders and other RF-emitting devices.
2. Contact an authorized Lexicon dealer.
3. Contact Lexicon customer service at 781-280-0300 or
www.lexicon.com.
Note:
Visit the knowledgebase at http://www.lexicon.com/kbase for
answers to frequently asked questions and additional troubleshooting information.
2. Replace unshielded cables with shielded cables wherever possible.
The RV-5 is exhibiting erratic behavior.
1. Set the rear-panel power switch to the c (“off”) position. Wait
10 seconds. Then set the rear-panel power switch to the |
(“on”) position.
2. Use the RV-5 configuration tool to download the current RV-5
configuration to a personal computer (PC) or document all userdefined settings on the Installation Worksheet that begins on
page D-2. Then, follow the instructions on the next page to
restore factory-default settings.
If all else fails...
The tuner volume suddenly went mute, then after a minute it
resumed. This seems to happen occasionally.
Under the TUNER SETUP menu, is the AUTO FREQUENCY option
active? You may be experiencing broadcast station dropouts. When
the broadcast signal drops out, the volume is muted and AUTO
FREQUENCY activates, scanning for alternate broadcast frequencies
and then verifying that the station ID is an exact match. If the
station ID matches and the alternate frequency is a stronger signal,
then the tuner switches to the alternate frequency and turns off the
volume mute. Otherwise, auto frequency scans for another
alternate frequency and repeats the procedure. If there are a lot of
alternate broadcast frequencies, this process can take a noticeable
amount of time. To stop this behavior, simply turn off the Auto
frequency option.
1. Document all user-defined settings on the Installation
Worksheet that begins on page D-2. Then, follow the instructions on page 7-4 to restore factory-default settings.
7-3
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Lexicon
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
low-pressure blower can be used to remove dust from its
exterior surface.
The bulleted items below describe routine maintenance that should
be performed on a periodic basis.
•
Clean the RV-5 exterior surface with a soft, lint-free cloth. Do
not use alcohol, benzene, acetone-based cleaners or strong
commercial cleaners. Do not use a cloth made with steel wool
or metal polish. If the RV-8 is exposed to a dusty environment, a
•
Replace the remote control batteries as needed. The remote
control requires four AAA batteries. When these batteries are
low on power, the remote control enters a low-voltage
condition that prevents it from operating the RV-5. Normal
operation will resume when new batteries are installed.
RESTORING FACTORY-DEFAULT SETTINGS
When factory-default settings are restored, all parameters and userdefined values are restored to their factory-default settings. Before
restoring factory-default settings, record all user-defined settings in
the Installation Worksheet in the Appendix on page D-2.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
FACTORY SETTINGS
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART
To restore factory-default settings:
1. Record all user-defined settings on the Installation Worksheet
that begins on page D-2. When factory-default settings are
restored, all parameters and user-defined values are restored to
their factory-default settings.
2. If the RV-5 is powered on, press the front-panel standby button
or the remote control Off button to activate standby mode and
deactivate the RV-5. If the RV-5 is in standby mode, proceed to
step 3.
7-4
3. Press the front-panel standby button or the remote control On
button to deactivate standby mode and activate the RV-5.
4. Quickly press and hold the front-panel or remote control Mute
button until the FACTORY SETTINGS menu opens in the onscreen and front-panel displays.
5. Press the remote control
and
arrow buttons to highlight
the desired option. Highlight the RESTORE DEFAULTS option to
restore factory-default settings. Highlight the EXIT option to
close the FACTORY SETTINGS menu without restoring factorydefault settings.
6. When the desired option is highlighted, press the remote
control
arrow button to select this option.
•
If the RESTORE DEFAULTS option was selected, the
FACTORY SETTINGS message shown in the previous page
will appear in the on-screen and front-panel displays. When
this message appears, press a front-panel or remote control
button to restart the RV-5.
•
If the EXIT option is selected, the FACTORY SETTINGS menu
will close and the two-line status will open in the on-screen
and front-panel displays.
A
Appendix
Specifications ............................................................................. A-2
Declaration of Conformity.......................................................... A-4
Menu Tree ................................................................................. A-5
Installation Worksheet .............................................................. A-20
Appendix
Lexicon
SPECIFICATIONS
Main Zone Audio Performance
Input Impedance
Audio Input & Output Connectors
Analog Audio Inputs
Eight stereo (RCA) or five stereo and one 5.1-channel or 2
stereo and two 5.1-channel connectors
Digital Audio Inputs
• Four S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) and four S/PDIF optical
connectors
• Coaxial and optical input connectors conform to IEC958, S/PDIF standards
• Accepts 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96kHz sample rates
• Accepts 16-24-bit PCM audio, Dolby Digital, DTS and
DTS-ES discrete data formats
Main Zone Audio
Outputs
Eight unbalanced (RCA) connectors for Front L/R, Center,
Sub, Side L/R and Rear L/R
Zone 2 Audio Outputs • One unbalanced (RCA, variable output level) stereo connector
• One unbalanced (RCA, fixed output level) stereo connector
• One S/PDIF coaxial (RCA) connector and one optical connector
Headphone
Amplifier
One stereo (1/4-inch phone) connector
Seven channels, two channels assigned to Zone 2 or Zone 3
Main Zone Audio Performance
100kΩ in parallel with 150pF
Preamp Output Level • 150mV Rms typical, 6V Rms maximum (RCA connectors)
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume
at +12dB
Preamp Output
Impedance
500Ω in parallel with 150pF (RCA connectors)
Zone 2 Audio Performance
A/D Conversion
24-Bit, 44.1 to 96kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture (Zone 2 only)
D/A Conversion
24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture
Frequency Response
10Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.25dB, –0.75dB at 40kHz,
reference 1kHz
THD + Noise
Below 0.005% at 1kHz, (1V Rms output level)
Dynamic Range
101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
101dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth
Input Sensitivity
200mV Rms (4V Rms for maximum output level)
Input Impedance
100kΩ in parallel with 150pF
Preamp Output Level • 200mV Rms typical, 4V Rms maximum
• Maximum value with full-scale input signal and volume
at 0dB
Preamp Output
Impedance
300Ω in parallel with 150pF
A/D Conversion
24-Bit, 96kHz, dual-bit ΔΣ architecture
D/A Conversion
24-Bit, 44.1 to 192kHz, multibit ΔΣ architecture
*Frequency Response
20Hz to 20kHz, +0.1dB/–0.1dB, –0.25dB at 40kHz,
–0.5dB at 40kHz, reference 1kHz
Video Input & Output Connectors
*THD + Noise
Below 0.02%, 20Hz to 20kHz, 140W Rms all channels driven
Video Inputs
*Dynamic Range
• 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted
• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted
Five composite (RCA), five S-Video and three component
video (RCA)
Video Outputs
Two composite (RCA, one monitor and one Zone 2), two
S-Video (one monitor and one Zone 2) and one component
(RCA)
*Signal-to-Noise Ratio • 105dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, “A” weighted
• 102dB minimum, 22kHz bandwidth, unweighted
Input Sensitivity
200mV Rms (2V Rms for maximum output level) at 0dB
input gain
Composite & S-Video Performance
Compatibility
A-2
NTSC, PAL and SECAM
RV-5
Appendix
Composite & S-Video Performance
FM Tuner Performance
Switching
Active
Frequency Response
50Hz to 16kHz, +0.1dB/-1.0dB
Output Level
1.0V peak-to-peak
THD + Noise
<0.4% at 1 kHz (stereo)
Impedance
75Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 50dB minimum at 60dBmV
Input Return Loss
>40dB
Image Rejection
>50dB, >60dB typical
Differential Gain
<0.5%
AM Suppression
>45dB, >55dB typical
Differential Phase
<0.5°
Bandwidth
>25MHz
K Factor
<0.3%
Gain
±0.15dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio >65dB
Frequency Response
10Hz to 10MHz + 0.1/–0.3dB
AM Tuner Performance
Tuning Range
520 to 1720kHz
Usable Sensitivity
<8uV, 4mV typical
THD + Noise
< 0.56%, 0.20% typical (1kHz, 60dBmV, 30% mod)
Wideband AGC
>80dBmV
Component Video Performance
Phono Performance (MM)
Compatibility
3-Channel (Y, Pr, Pb), format-independent
Frequency Response
50Hz to 20kHz, +0.5dB/-0.5dB, rumble filter -4dB at 10Hz
Switching
Passive
THD + Noise
< 0.20%, 20Hz to 10kHz, 4.7mV input
Impedance
75Ω
Signal-to-Noise Ratio 72dB minimum
Insertion Loss
<3dB
Bandwidth
>150MHz
Video Converter
NTSC, PAL, SECAM, to Y/Pb/Pr
Microphone Input Connectors
Inputs
4 3.5mm miniature phone jacks
Input Sensitivity
10mV Rms (400mV maximum input level)
Input Impedance
20kΩ (accepts balanced or unbalanced input signals)
Compatible Amplifier Connectors
Banana Plugs
Standard 0.75 inch plugs
Spade Connectors
Size 10-12 gauge
Bare Wire
Up to 10 gauge bare wire
Other
Trigger Outputs
One power on/off and one programmable connector on
detachable screw terminals (+12 VDC, 0.5 amps each)
FM Tuner Performance
64MHz to 108MHz
RS-232 Serial Input/
Output
Two 9-pin D-sub connectors
Tuning Range
Usable Sensitivity
<4uV, 1.6mV typical
Power Requirements
Selectivity
>87dBmV, 93dBmV typical
120-230 VAC, 50-60Hz, 60W (universal line input), detachable power cord
A-3
Appendix
Lexicon
Other
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Power Requirements
120VAC 60Hz, 5.0W (standby), 1.3kW (maximum)
230VAC 50Hz, _____W (standby), _____kW (maximum)
universal line input, detachable power cord
RV-5
Dimensions &
Weight
•
•
•
•
Rack-Mounting
• Optional brackets are available for installation in a
standard 19" equipment rack (two rack units required)
Environment
• Operating temperature: 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)
• Storage temperature: –20° to 60°C (–4° to 140°F)
• Relative humidity: 95% maximum without condensation
EN 61000-3-2:2000 + A2:2005
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001
Remote Control
• Handheld, backlit infrared remote control unit,
preprogrammed and learning
• Requires 4 AAA batteries (alkaline batteries recommended)
EN 60065:2002
Height (with feet): 6.496 inches (165 mm)
Width: 17.717 inches (450 mm)
Depth: 15.748 inches (400 mm)
Weight: 39.7 lbs (18kg)
Application of Council Directive(s):
2004/108/EEC and 73/23/EEC as amended by 93/68/EEC
Standard(s) to Which Conformity is Declared:
EN 55013:2001 + A1:2003
EN 55020:2002 + A1:2003 + A2:2005
Manufacturer:
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Harman Specialty Group
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
The equipment identified here conforms to the Directive(s) and Standard(s) specified above.
Type of Equipment: Digital Receiver
Model:
Lexicon RV-5
Date:
January 2007
Harman Specialty Group
Vice President of Engineering
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413 USA
Tel: 781-280-0300
Fax: 781-280-0490
A-4
RV-5
Appendix
MAIN MENU: SETUP MENU
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
DISPLAY SETUP
DISPLAY TYPE:
CRT
4:3
ASPECT RATIO:
HDMI/DVI
CONNECTION:
YES
HDMI AUDIO OUT:
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
continued on page A-6
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
DOLBY CONFIGURATION
DVD 1
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
ON
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
MODE:
DOLBY PLii MU
CENTER WIDTH:
DIMENSION:
OFF
PANORAMA:
OFF
NIGHT:
continued on page A-8
continued on page A-13
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2
DEFAULT SUR:
VIDEO IN:
V-PROCESS:
VIDEO OUT:
HDMI LINK:
ADVANCED VIDEO
A/V SYNC DELAY:
TRIGGER 2:
ZONE 2 OUT:
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
REAR AMP:
AUTOMATIC
AUTO EQ ONLY
MANUAL
SURROUND CONFIG
LOGIC 7 DEFAULT:
DVD 1
DOLBY MULTI-CHANNEL
DOLBY 2.0
DTS
PCM 44.1/48kHz
PCM 96kHz
continued on page A-13
REAR SPK
continued on page A-13
USE LAST
HDMI 2
BYPASS
--ON
0 ms
ON
ANALOG
POWER ON SETTINGS
POWER ON VOL:
LAST
DOCK AUTO POWER: OFF
continued on page A-13
continued on page A-8
A-5
Appendix
Lexicon
SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
REAR AMP: REAR SPK
AUTOMATIC
AUTO EQ ONLY
MANUAL
AUTOMATIC
EZ SET DESIGN SET 1
Automatic selection of
x-over, Freq, Channel
Adjust, Delay Adjust
and Room Equalization
Place mic at ear
level near listening
position, at least
3 ft/0.9 m from any
hard surface.
Set volume to -25dB
CONTINUE FAR FIELD
SKIP FAR FIELD
BACK TO SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
CONTINUE
BACK TO SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
SPEAKERS
AUTO SETTINGS: OFF
FRONT L/R:
80Hz
CENTER:
80Hz
SIDE L/R:
80Hz
REAR/Z2 L/R:
80Hz
SUB/LFE LPF:
80Hz
SUBWOOFERS:
20Hz
SUB HPF:
SUB MODE: LFE ONLY
MANUAL
SPEAKERS
SPEAKER DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
AUTO EQ:
OFF
ADJUST EQ
SPEAKER DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
ON
OFF
ADJUST EQ
TILT:
A-6
+0dB
AUTO SETTINGS:
OFF
INPUT:
ALL
TEST TONE:
AUTO
FRONT LEFT:
+0dB
CENTER:
+0dB
FRONT RIGHT:
+0dB
SIDE RIGHT:
+0dB
REAR RIGHT:
+0dB
REAR LEFT:
+0dB
SIDE LEFT:
+0dB
SUBWOOFER1:
+0dB
SUBWOOFER2:
+0dB
RESTORE DEFAULTS
AUTO SETTINGS: OFF
FEET
UNITS:
15
FRONT LEFT:
15
CENTER:
15
FRONT RIGHT:
15
SIDE RIGHT:
15
REAR RIGHT:
15
REAR LEFT:
15
SIDE LEFT:
15
SUBWOOFERS:
RESTORE DEFAULTS
ON
OFF
RV-5
Appendix
SETUP MENU: DISPLAY SETUP
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
CRT
DISPLAY TYPE:
4:3
ASPECT RATIO:
HDMI/DVI
CONNECTION:
YES
HDMI AUDIO OUT:
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY SETUP
2-LINE OSD:
MENU TIME OUT:
PLEASE WAIT
OFF
50s
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY SETUP
BRIGHTNESS:
TIME OUT:
FULL
OFF
SETUP MENU: INPUT SETUP
SETUP
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
DVD
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
ON
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
INPUT NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
PRESS MENU
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2
DEFAULT SUR:
VIDEO IN:
V-PROCESS:
VIDEO OUT:
HDMI LINK:
ADVANCED VIDEO
A/V SYNC DELAY:
TRIGGER 2:
ZONE-2 OUT:
USELAST
LAST
USE
HDMI 2
BYPASS
OFF
100mS
OFF
DOWNMIX
ADVANCED VIDEO 1
INPUT TYPE:
VCR
SHARPNESS:
32
NOISE REDUCTION: ON
X-COLOR SUPRESS: ON
DCDi INTERPOL:
ON
FILM DETECTION:
ON
FILM EDIT DETECT: ON
TO
RESTORE INPUT NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD
MAIN MENU
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
ADVANCED VIDEO 2
FLESHTONE NR:
COMPNT ENHANCE:
BRIGHTNESS:
CONTRAST:
COLOR:
TEST PAT:
ON
ON
100
100
100
OFF
A-7
Appendix
Lexicon
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 1
INPUT SETUP: INPUT SETUP 2
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
DVD
INPUT:
NAME: ________
DIG AUDIO:
HDMI 2
ANLG AUDIO:
NONE
DIG/ANLG AUTO:
ON
48kHz
A/D SAMPLE RATE:
STEREO
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
2-CHANNEL
DEFAULT SUR:
VIDEO IN:
V-PROCESS:
ADVANCED VIDEO
A/V SYNC DELAY:
TRIGGER 2:
ZONE-2 OUT:
USE LAST
HDMI 2
BYPASS
0 ms
ON
ANALOG
Selecting an INPUT SETUP menu item opens the corresponding menu shown below. These menus are
identical regardless of which input is selected. The
MAIN ADV menus shown on the next page indicate
factory-default parameter settings for each input.
DVD1
DVD1 INPUT NAME
DVD1 ANALOG IN
DVD1 VIDEO IN
DVD1 2-CH MODE
EDIT INPUT NAME
RESTORE DEFAULT NAME
ANALOG-1
ANALOG-2
ANALOG-3
ANALOG-4
ANALOG-5
ANALOG-6
ANALOG-7
ANALOG-8
PHONO
TUNER
NONE
LIVE!
COMPOSITE-1
COMPOSITE-2
COMPOSITE-3
COMPOSITE-4
COMPOSITE-5
S-VIDEO-1
S-VIDEO-2
S-VIDEO-3
S-VIDEO-4
S-VIDEO-5
NONE
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PRO LOGIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
HEADPHONE
USE LAST
PRESS MENU
TO
RESTORE INPUT NAME
EDIT INPUT NAME
DVD1
BUTTONS TO EDIT
UP TO 8 CHARACTERS
BUTTON TO ADVANCE
DVD1 DIGITAL IN
COAX-1
COAX-2
COAX-3
COAX-4
OPTICAL-1
OPTICAL-2
OPTICAL-3
OPTICAL-4
NONE
The appearance of the ANALOG
IN menu depends on the configuration of the analog audio input
connectors. Refer to page 3-8 for
more information.
DVD1 ANLG IN LVL
COMPONENT-1
COMPONENT-2
COMPONENT-3
VIDEO
NONE
-18 to +12dB
ON
+0.dB
AUTO
MANUAL
ON
OFF
AUTO GAIN
dB L
-6
-15
-30
-45
A-8
DVD1 COMPONENT
+0.0dB
Indicates the current amount of
analog audio input level adjustment for the selected analog
audio input connector. This
parameter cannot be adjusted.
D MODE
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
DIGITAL
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
HEADPHONE 5.1
USE LAST
DVD1
MODE
FILM
MUSIC
2-CHAN
AUTO
OFF
DIGITAL
ANALOG
AUTO
DVD1 MAIN ADV
INPUT SELECT
ANALOG BYPASS
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO OSD 4:3
COMPONENT OSD
LEGACY VIDEO
DIGITAL
OFF
AUTO
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
HEADPHONE
USE LAST
DVD1 ZONE2 ADV
DVD1 5.1a MODE
5.1a
FILM
5.1a
MUSIC
5.1 STANDARD
5.1 2-CHANNEL
HEADPHONE 5.1a
USE LAST
ANLG IN LVL
DIGITAL BYPASS
DIG OUT RATE
RECORD
+0dB
OFF
44.1kHz
ENABLED
BLOCKED
ENABLED
-18 to +12dB
44.1kHz
48kHz
88.2kHz
96kHz
ON
OFF
RV-5
Appendix
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
CHECK MICROPHONES
CHECK MICROPHONES
CHECK MICROPHONES
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
SET CROSSOVERS
GROUP MICROPHONES
INTO A BUNDLE IN THE
MIDDLE OF THE ROOM
CHECKING FOR SILENCE
CHECKING MICROPHONES
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
PLACE MICROPHONES
IN PRIMARY LISTENING
POSITIONS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
or
CHECK MICROPHONES
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
MIC 1
MIC 2
When an ERROR message appears on the last CHECK
MICROPHONES screen, pressing the
arrow button opens the SPEAKER SETUP menu. When no
ERROR message appears on the last CHECK MICROPHONES screen, pressing the arrow button opens
the AUTO SPEAKER SETUP menu.
PLEASE WAIT
PRESS TO
BEGIN MIC CHECK
SPEAKER SETUP
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
PLEASE WAIT
ERROR
OK
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS
PRESS TO CONTINUE
(MICROPHONE)
OK
(MICROPHONE)
NOT DETECTED
or
(MICROPHONE)
SIGNAL TOO LOW
or
(MICROPHONE)
OUT OF RANGE
or
(MICROPHONE)
TOO MUCH ROOM NOISE
When an ERROR message appears on the last
CHECK MICROPHONES
screen, press the
or
arrow button to highlight
the desired microphone.
Then, press the
arrow
button to view more
details about the error.
One of the messages
shown to the left will
appear in the on-screen
display.
A-9
Appendix
Lexicon
SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
SETTINGSETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
or
CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
DISTANCES
LEVELS
OK
OK
AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
!CAUTION!
40 Hz
HIGH AUDIO
60 HzLEVELS
TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10
60 Hz
YOU WILL60
HAVE
Hz 10 SEC
TO LEAVE 40
THEHzROOM OR
SIT QUIETLY
OFF
PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN
N/A
PRESSAPART
TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN
MIC CHECK REQUIRED
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION
SETTINGSETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
PLACE MICROPHONES
AROUND PREFERRED
LISTENING POSITIONS
CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
DISTANCES
LEVELS
ERROR
ERROR
AUTO VALUES APPLIED
PRESS TO VIEW
DETAILS
LEVELS
OK
DISTANCES
When the RV-8 is finished calibrating speaker distances and output levels, the AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP results screen shown at the left will open in
the on-screen display, indicating the results for
each calibration procedure. Press the
or
arrow button to highlight the desired calibration
procedure. Then, press the
arrow button to
select this procedure. Selecting DISTANCES opens
the AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below.
Selecting the LEVELS option opens the AUTO LEVELS screen shown below.
OK
The AUTO DISTANCES and AUTO LEVELS screens
shown on the right indicate the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the selected
speaker.
Press the
arrow button to return to the AUTO
SPEAKER SETUP results screen shown above (right).
Then, press the
arrow button to select the other
calibration procedure or press the
arrow button
to return to the SPEAKER SETUP menu.
A-10
AUTO LEVELS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
(SPEAKER)
ERROR
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW
AUTO DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE
(SPEAKER)
SIGNAL TOO LOW
(SPEAKER)
UNABLE TO CALCULATE
(SPEAKER)
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE
(SPEAKER)
OK
ERROR
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
OK
RV-5
Appendix
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
DISTANCES & LEVELS
DISTANCES
OUTPUT LEVELS
SETTINGSETUP
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
AUTO DISTANCES
AUTO DISTANCES
ORIGINAL DISTANCES
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUB (MONO)
SR
RR
0.0ft
0.0ft
ERROR
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
SUB
0.0ft
0.0ft
SL RL
0.0ft
0.0ft
ORIGINAL DISTANCES
APPLIED
AUTO DISTANCES
APPLIED
(SPEAKER)
SPEAKER OUT OF PHASE
(SPEAKER)
SIGNAL TOO LOW
PLACE MICROPHONES
AROUND PREFERRED
LISTENING POSITIONS
SETTINGSETUP
LEVELS
CUSTOM
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
YOU WILL60
HAVE
Hz 10 SEC
TO LEAVE 40
THEHzROOM OR
SIT QUIETLY
OFF
PRESS TO SKIP
COUNTDOWN
N/A
The AUTO LEVELS screen shown below indicates the
individual calibration results for each speaker. Press the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired
speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the
selected speaker.
SET LEVELS
AUTO LEVELS
AUTO LEVELS
ORIGINAL LEVELS
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
0.0dB
SR
RR
0.0dB
0.0dB
(SPEAKER)
MAY NOT BE ACCURATE
ERROR
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO HIGH
(SPEAKER)
SPKR OUTPUT TOO LOW
(SPEAKER)
OK
0.0dB
SUB
OK
TEST WILL BEGIN IN
10
PRESSAPART
TO BEGIN
COUNTDOWN
(SPEAKER)
UNABLE TO CALCULATE
(SPEAKER)
AUTO SPEAKER SETUP
!CAUTION!
40 Hz
HIGH AUDIO
60 HzLEVELS
60 Hz
MIC CHECK REQUIRED
FOR AUTO CALIBRATION
The AUTO DISTANCES screen shown below indicates
the individual calibration results for each speaker. Press
the
and
arrow buttons to highlight the desired
speaker calibration parameter. Then, press the
arrow button to view more detailed results for the
selected speaker.
SET DISTANCES
0.0ft
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
CUSTOM
AUTO SPEAKER
SETUP SETUP
0.0dB
0.0dB
SL RL
0.0dB
0.0dB
AUTO LEVELS
APPLIED
ORIGINAL LEVELS
APPLIED
A-11
Appendix
Lexicon
SETUP MENU: SPEAKERS
(continued)
MAIN MENU
SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
MANUAL SPEAKER SETUP
LEVELS CALIBRATION
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
INPUTS
SPEAKERS
I/O CONFIG
DISPLAYS
VOLUME CONTROLS
TRIGGER
TUNER SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
LIVE! CALIBRATION
SET CROSSOVERS
CHECK MICROPHONES
AUTOMATIC
MANUAL
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
INTERNAL NOISE TEST
EXTERNAL NOISE TEST
BASS PEAK LIMITER
SET CROSSOVERS
BEFORE CALIBRATING
R SR
40Hz 60Hz
RR
60Hz
60Hz
SUB L
40Hz 40Hz
60Hz
SL RL
60Hz
SPEAKER
DISTANCES
CUSTOM
SETUP
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
UNITS
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
0.0ft
FEET
INTERNAL NOISE
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
SPEAKER LEVEL ADJUST
FRONT LEFT
CENTER
FRONT RIGHT
SIDE RIGHT
REAR RIGHT
REAR LEFT
SIDE LEFT
SUBWOOFER
METERS
FEET
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
BASS PEAK LIMITER
CAL NOISE
SUB LIMITER
LIMIT ADJ
ON
ON
100dB
!CAUTION!
HIGH AUDIO LEVELS
0.0 to 30.0ft or 12.0m
-18 to 12dB
75 to 120dB
ON
OFF
A-12
RV-5
Appendix
SETUP MENU: MUTE LEVELS
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
SETUP MENU: DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
MAIN ZONE:
ZONE 2:
-30dB
-30dB
SETUP
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DOLBY CONFIG
MODE:
DOLBY PLII MU
CENTER WIDTH:
DIMENSION:
PANORAMA:
OFF
NIGHT:
OFF
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
SETUP MENU: POWER ON SETTINGS
FACTORY SETTINGS
MAIN MENU
SETUP
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
POWER ON SETTINGS
POWER ON VOL:
-30dB
OFF
DOCK AUTO POWER:
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
FACTORY SETTINGS
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART
Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section
that begins on page 7-4 for more information.
SETUP MENU: SURROUND CONFIG
MAIN MENU
SETUP
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
DISPLAY SETUP
SPEAKER/EQ SETUP
INPUT SETUP
SURROUND CONFIG
DOLBY CONFIG
MUTE LEVELS
POWER ON SETTINGS
DOLBY MULTI-CHANNEL
DOLBY VIRTUAL:
ON
LOGIC 7:
ON
STEREO DOWNMIX: ON
SURROUND CONFIG
LOGIC 7 DEFAULT:
ON
DOLBY MULTI-CHANNEL
DOLBY 2.0
DTS
PCM 44.1/48 kHz
PCM 96 kHz
DOLBY 2.0
DTS
PCM 44.1/48 kHz
PCM 96 kHz
LOGIC 7:
DOLBY PLII:
DOLBY PLIIx:
DTS NEO:6:
5/7 CH STEREO:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
LOGIC 7:
DOLBY PLII:
DOLBY PLIIx:
DOLBY VIRTUAL:
DTS NEO:6:
HALL:
5/7 CH STEREO:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DTS 96/24:
DTS + NEO:6:
DTS-ES MATRIX:
DTS-ES DISCRETE:
LOGIC 7:
STEREO DOWNMIX:
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DOLBY PLII:
DOLBY PLIIx:
DOLBY VIRTUAL:
LOGIC 7:
ON
ON
ON
ON
A-13
Appendix
Lexicon
MAIN MENU: VIDEO CONTROLS
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
VIDEO CONTROLS
4:3 IN>16:9 DISPLAY
ORIGINAL
VIDEO STATUS
VIDEO STATUS
--INPUT RESOL:
OFF
COPY PROTECTION:
VIDEO PROCESS:
BYPASS
--OUTPUT RESOL:
480i
COMPONENT OUT:
S-VIDEO OUT:
OFF
COMPOSITE OUT:
OFF
ORIGINAL
LB ZOOM
STRETCH
2.35 LB ZOOM
2.35 LB STRETCH
STRETCH 2
AUTO
MAIN MENU: AUDIO CONTROLS
MAIN MENU
AUDIO CONTROLS
AUDIO CONTROLS
VIDEO CONTROLS
SETUP
EQ PRESET
TONE CONTROLS
BASS
TREBLE
AUDIO STATUS
AUDIO STATUS
INPUT:
NAME:
CONNECTOR:
AUDIO:
MODE FAMILY:
MODE:
A-14
EQ PRESET
OFF
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
PRESET 1: BYPASS
PRESET 2: BYPASS
PRESET 3: BYPASS
ACTIVE PS:
USER
-6.0 to +6.0dB
-6.0 to +6.0dB
ON
OFF
RV-5
Appendix
MAIN MENU: MODE ADJUST
MAIN MENU
MODE ADJUST
AUDIO CONTROLS
TUNER PRESETS
SETUP
* These listening mode
names differ depending on the current
input source, speaker
setup and parameter
settings. Refer to the
Listening Mode
Descriptions for more
information.
MODE ADJUST
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx MOV*
PLIIx MUS*
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PRO LOGIC
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HHALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1 FILM
5.1 TV
5.1 MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV*
5.1 PLIIx MUS*
DIGITAL EX*
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM*
MUSIC*
2-CHAN*
5.1a FILM
5.1a MUSIC
5.1a STANDARD
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
MODE ADJUST
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1
HEADPHONE
HEADPHONE 5.1a
LIVE! SMALL
LIVE! MED
LIVE! LARGE
FILM
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
+0.0dB
ON
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
PLIIx MOV
CIN
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
+0.0dB
FILM
OFF
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
PANORAMA
OFF
CTR WIDTH
DIMENSION
NEUTRAL
10ms
SURROUND DLY
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC
+0.0dB
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
MUSIC
SOUND STAGE
NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
SURR ROLLOFF
7.0kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
ON
OFF
MUSIC SURR
VOCAL ENHANCE +0.0dB
FRONT STEERING MSURR
SOUND STAGE NEUTRAL
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
BASS ENHANCE
OFF
7.0kHz
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PLII MOVIE
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PLII MUSIC
PANORAMA
CTR WIDTH
DIMENSION
SURROUND DLY
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PRO LOGIC
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
MID RT
BASS RT
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC
PLIIx MUS
TV
AUTO AZIMUTH
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CATHEDRAL
OFF
NEUTRAL
10ms
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
NIGHTCLUB
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
LIVENESS
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
11
ON
5m
196ms
5ms
9.0kHz
+3dB
CONCERT HALL
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
LIVENESS
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
12
ON
20m
1.72ms
OFF
2.4kHz
-2dB
CENTER DEPTH
SPEECH DETECT
SIZE
MID RT
BASS RT
PRE-DELAY
ROLLOFF
EFFECT LVL
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
PANORAMA
EFFECT LVL
+4dB
BASS CONTENT
STEREO
LOW FREQ WIDTH
+0
SURR ROLLOFF
3.1kHz
REAR DLY OFFSET
15ms
INPUT BALANCE

CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
2-CH SURROUND
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
2-CHANNEL
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
CHURCH
12
ON
30m
3.72s
4.47s
23ms
3.1kHz
-8dB
+0dB
MONO LOGIC
ON
20m
1.56s
1.87s
24ms
2.4kHz
-3dB
EFFECT LVL
ACADMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
-9dB
ON
3.1kHz
MONO SURROUND
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MONO
SUB LVL
CUSTOM
+0dB
A-15
Appendix
5.1 FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 TV
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
Lexicon
+0.0dB
ON
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
OFF
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
FILM
OFF
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
OFF
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
MUSIC
OFF
NEUTRAL
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
OFF
+0.0dB
5.1 PLIIx MOV
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1 PLIIx MUS
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
DIGITAL EX
EX DECODING
COMPRESSION
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
5.1 2-CHANNEL
CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0
MASTER LEVEL
+0dB
COMPRESSION
OFF
LFE MIX
+0.0dB
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
CUSTOM
SUB LEVEL
CUSTOM
FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+-9dB
EFFECT LVL
ACADEMY FI8LTER
+ON
3.1kHz
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
LFE MIX
DECODING
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1a 2-CHANNEL
2-CHAN
+0dB
+0.0dB
ON
REAR
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
+0.0dB
AUTO
+0.0dB
MUSIC
OFF
NEUTRAL
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
+0.0dB
AUTO
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
A-16
5.1 MONO
AUTO
OFF
+0.0dB
+0.0dB
AUTO
+0dB
CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0dB
MASTER LEVEL
+0.0dB
LFE MIX
AUTO
DECODING
+0dB
SUB L/R LVL
CUSTOM
CENTER MIX
+0dB
SURROUND MIX
+0dB
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
+0
MASTER LEVEL+0dBLFE LFE
MIX
+0.0dB
SUB LEVEL
+0dB
CUSTOM
5.1a FILM
VOCAL ENHANCE
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1a MUSIC
VOCAL ENHANCE
FRONT STEERING
RE-EQUALIZER
SOUND STAGE
5 SPKR ENHANCE
BASS ENHANCE
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
LFE MIX
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
5.1a STANDARD
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+0.0dB
ON
NEUTRAL
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
+0.0dB
5.1a BYPASS
1.84s
2.76s
2.4kHz
3.1kHz
18ms
LIVE! MED ADVANCED
REVERB LVL
-4dB
EARLY RFLX LVL
-14dB
BASS XOVER
156Hz
SHAPE
SPREAD
25%
SIZE
30m
2CH BYPASS
NO PARAMETERS
HEADPHONES
NO PARAMETERS
LIVE! LARGE
MID RT
BASS RT
ROLLOFF
TREB CUT RT
PRE DELAY
ADVANCED
CUSTOM
HEADPHONES 5.1
NO PARAMETERS
+0.0dB
MUSIC
ON
NEUTRAL
ON
OFF
7.0kHz
15ms
+0.0dB
LIVE! MED
MID RT
BASS RT
ROLLOFF
TREB CUT RT
PRE DELAY
ADVANCED
CUSTOM
HEADPHONES
NO PARAMETERS
HEADPHONES 5.1a
NO PARAMETERS
LIVE! SMALL
MID RT
BASS RT
ROLLOFF
TREB CUT RT
PRE DELAY
ADVANCED
CUSTOM
597ms
597ms
3.1kHz
3.1kHz
10ms
LIVE! SMALL ADVANCED
REVERB LVL
+0dB
EARLY RFLX LVL
-13dB
BASS XOVER
156Hz
SHAPE
SPREAD
0%
SIZE
19m
4.71s
4.71s
3.1kHz
2.4kHz
20ms
LIVE! LARGE ADVANCED
REVERB LVL
-6dB
EARLY RFLX LVL
-17dB
BASS XOVER
156Hz
SHAPE
SPREAD
28%
SIZE
38m
RV-5
Appendix
MODE ADJUST
(continued)
Selecting the listening mode menu CALIBRATION, OUTPUT LEVELS or CUSTOM option opens the corresponding menu path shown below. The CALIBRATION option is available for
the PANORAMA listening mode. The OUTPUT LEVELS and CUSTOM options are available for most listening modes. These menus are identical regardless of which listening mode is
selected. Listening mode menu parameter drop-down menus are shown below and on the next page.
PANORAMA
EFFECT LVL
BASS CONTENT
LOW FREQ WIDTH
SURR ROLLOFF
REAR DLY OFFSET
INPUT BALANCE
CALIBRATION
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
+4dB
STEREO
+0
3.1kHz
15ms

PANORAMA CALIBRATION
MONO LOGIC
SOURCE
LEFT & RIGHT
SPEAKER ANGLE
30deg
LISTENER POS
+0
EFFECT LVL
ACADMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
NOTE:
ENSURE THAT
“SPEAKER SETUP” HAS
BEEN PROPERLY
PERFORMED
MONO LOGIC
OUTPUT LEVELS
-9dB
ON
3.1kHz
3.1kHz
CENTER
SIDE L/R
REAR L/R
SUB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
+0dB
EFFECT LVL
ACADMY FILTER
SURR ROLLOFF
OUTPUT LEVELS
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
-9dB
ON
+0
3.1kHz
CUSTOM VS PRESET
RESET MODE
Selecting a listening mode menu parameter opens the corresponding parameter drop-down menu shown below and on the next page. These drop-down menus are identical
regardless of which listening mode is selected. However, certain parameter ranges differ from listening mode to listening mode.
5 SPKR ENHANCE
ON
OFF
ACADEMY FILTER
BASS CONTENT
BINAURL
MONO
STEREO
BASS ENHANCE
ON
OFF
AUTO AZIMUTH
ON
OFF
CENTER
CNTR DLY SAMPLES
OFF, -30 to +12dB
CENTER DEPTH
ON
OFF
BASS RT
COMPRESSION
0 to 18
CENTER MIX
5ms to 48.6s
-127 to +127
-25 to +5dB
AUTO
ON
OFF
CTR WIDTH
MIN,1 to 6, MAX
CUSTOM VS PRESET
PRESET
CUSTOM
DIMENSION
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR
EFFECT LVL
-12 to +6dB
DECODING
AUTO
ON
OFF
EX DECODING
AUTO
ON
OFF
FRONT STEERING
OFF
MSURR
MUSIC
FILM
A-17
Appendix
Lexicon
INPUT BALANCE
L<

MASTER LEVEL
>R
LFE MIX
MID RT
-20.0 or -10.0 to +0.0dB
CENTER MIX
-127
+0
+127
24ms to 24.3s
ON
OFF
PRE-DELAY
30ms to 20.2s
LOW FREQ WIDTH
-25 to +25
REAR DLY OFFSET
OFF, 1 to 30ms
REAR L/R
PANORAMA
LIVENESS
A-18
-5 to +5dB
OFF, 1 to 100ms
RE-EQUALIZER
ON
OFF
OFF, -30 to 12dB
RESET MODE
PRESS RIGHT
TO RESTORE MODE
ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
SIDE L/R
OFF, -30 to 12dB
SIZE
SPEECH DETECT
4 to 20 or 30ms
SOUND STAGE
FRONT
NEUTRAL
REAR
SOURCE
ON
OFF
SUB LEVEL
OFF, -30 to 12dB
SUB L/R LVL
RIGHT
LEFT & RIGHT
LEFT
SPEAKER ANGLE
10 to 90deg
OFF, -30 to 12dB
SURR ROLLOFF
500Hz to 20.0kHz, OFF
SURROUND DLY
0 to 15ms
SURROUND EX
AUTO
ON
OFF
SURROUND MIX
+5 to +5dB
VOCAL ENHANCE
+6.0dB
+3.0dB
+0.0dB
RV-5
Appendix
MAIN MENU: RESTORE DEFAULTS
FACTORY SETTINGS
Refer to the Restoring Factory-Default Settings section that begins on page 7-4 for more information.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT
RESTORE DEFAULTS
HAVE BEEN RESTORED
PRESS ANY KEY
TO RESTART
2CH STATUS
STATUS MENUS
STATUS
PG1
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
ENCODING
dB L
-6
-15
-30
SL SR
STATUS
WORD LENGTH
SAMPLE RATE
PG2
D STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
INPUT
MODE
CHANNELS
BIT RATE
EX ENCODING
dB L
-6
-15
-30
dB L
-6
-15
-30
PG1
SL SR
LFE
D STATUS
-45
-45
5.1a STATUS
5.1a BYPASS STATUS
2CH BYPASS STATUS
DIGITAL STATUS
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
ANLG
96kHz
PG2
SAMPLE RATE
2.0 ENCODING
DIALOG OFFSET
MIX ROOM
CENTER MIX LVL
SURR MIX LVL
LFE
-45
2CH STATUS
Refer to the Status Menus section that begins on page 2-29 for more information.
INPUT
MODE
INPUT TYPE
SAMPLE RATE
dB L
-6
-15
-30
-45
A-19
Appendix
Lexicon
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET
INPUT SETUP
NAME
DIGITAL IN
ANALOG IN
ANLG IN LVL
VIDEO IN
COMPONENT IN
2-CH
MIC
MAIN ADVANCED
INPUT SELECT
2-CH ANLG BYP
S-VIDEO 16:9
S-VIDEO 4:3 OSD
COMPONENT OSD
ZONE2 IN
A-20
DVD1
DVD2
LD
TV
SAT
VCR
CD
PVR
GAME
TAPE
TUNER
AUX
INSTALLATION WORKSHEET
SPEAKER SETUP
(continued)
CUSTOM SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCES
LEVELS CALIBRATION
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT
CENTER
SIDE LEFT/RIGHT
REAR LEFT/RIGHT
SUBWOOFER
BGC
ASA
UNITS
BASS PEAK LIMITERS
CAL NOISE
SUB LIMITER
LIMIT ADJ
REAR PANEL CONFIG
VOLUME CONTROL SETUP
LOCK OPTIONS
Circle one.
MAIN PWR ON
MODES
MUTE LEVEL
AUDIO CNTRL
ZONE PWR ON
SETUP
8 STEREO INPUTS
2 ST. & (2) 5.1 ANLG
5 ST. & (1) 5.1 ANLG
MAX VOLUME
Appendix
Lexicon
DISPLAY SETUP
TRIGGER SETUP
ON-SCREEN DISPLAY
Circle all parameters set to ON.
STATUS
POSITION
FORMAT
BACKGROUND
REMOTE STATE
FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY
STATUS
BRIGHTNESS
A/V SYNC DELAY
CUSTOM NAME
EDIT CUSTOM NAME
AUDIO CONTROLS
BASS
TREBLE
TILT EQ
LOUDNESS
BALANCE
FADER
ZONE2 BALANCE
A-22
REMOTE ONLY
DVD1
DVD2
SAT
VCR
TV
CD
CD
TUNER
AUX
ZONE2 INPUTS
FILM
TV
MUSIC
MUSIC SURR
PLIIx MOV
PLIIx MUS
PLII MOVIE
PLII MUSIC
PRO LOGIC
CIN
MUSIC
NIGHTCLUB
CONCERT HALL
CHURCH
CATHEDRAL
PANORAMA
2-CH SURROUND
2-CHANNEL
MONO LOGIC
MONO SURROUND
MONO
5.1
FILM
5.1
TV
5.1
MUSIC
5.1 PLIIx MOV
5.1 PLIIx MUS
DIGITAL EX
5.1 2-CHANNEL
5.1 MONO LOGIC
5.1 MONO SURR
5.1 MONO
FILM
MUSIC
2-CHAN
5.1a BYPASS
2CH BYPASS
PRODUCT
Please regi
purchase. T
or register
sales receip
LIMITED WARRANTY
ty Group offers the following warranty
uration of this Warranty?
will remain in effect for three (3) years
al date of purchase.
ed?
may be enforced by the original purbsequent owners during the warranty
d the original dated sales receipt or
warranty coverage is presented at time
red?
overs all defects in material and
on this product, except as specified
owing are not covered:
sulting from:
t, misuse, abuse, or neglect.
to follow instructions contained in the
de.
or attempted repair unauthorized by
Specialty Group.
to perform recommended periodic
nance.
er than product defects, including lack
mpetence, or experience on the part of
ccurring during any shipment of this
laims for shipping damages must be
the carrier.
4.
Damage to a unit that has been altered, or on
which the serial number has been defaced, modified, or removed.
What Expenses will Harman Specialty Group
Assume?
Harman Specialty Group will pay all labor and material
expenses for covered items. Payment of shipping
charges is discussed in the next section of the warranty.
How is Service Obtained?
When this product needs service, write, telephone, or
fax Harman Specialty Group to request information
about where the unit should be taken or sent. When
making a written request, please include your name,
complete address, and daytime telephone number;
the product model and serial numbers; and a description of the problem. Do not return the unit to Harman
Specialty Group without prior authorization.
When Shipping a Product for Service . . .
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pay any initial shipping charges, which are the
responsibility of the owner. If necessary repairs are
covered by this warranty, Harman Specialty
Group will pay return shipping charges to any
destination in the United States using the carrier
of our choice.
Pack the unit securely. Package insurance is
strongly recommended.
Include a copy of the original dated sales receipt.
(A copy of the original dated sales receipt must be
presented whenever warranty service is required.)
Do not include accessories such as power cords or
user guides unless instructed to do so.
Harman Specialty Group
3 Oak Park
Bedford, MA 01730-1413
USA
Tel 781-280-0300
Fax 781-280-0490
www.lexicon.com
What are the
Warranties?
Limitations
Mr.
Single
First Name
of
Implied
Any implied warranties, including warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are
limited in duration to the length of this warranty.
What Certain Damages are Excluded?
Harman Specialty Group’s liability for a defective
product is limited to repair or replacement of that
product, at our option. Harman Specialty Group shall
not be liable for damages based on inconvenience;
loss of use of the product; loss of time; interrupted
operation; commercial loss; or any other damages,
whether incidental, consequential, or otherwise.
This warranty is not enforceable outside of North
America. This warranty provides specific legal rights.
Additional rights may be provided by some states.
Last Name
Company
Title
Mailing Address
City
Telephone Number
Email Address
Product Model
Purchase Date
Version
Serial Number
Where did you purchase this product?
Age
Education
Under 18
High Schoo
18-24
College
25-34
Graduate S
35-49
Certificate:
50-64
65+
How did you learn about this product? C
Friend
Colleague
Teacher
How do State Laws Relate to this Warranty?
Some states do not allow limitations on the duration of
implied warranties and/or the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages. As such, the
above limitations may not apply.
Mrs.
Married
Store sales
Store displa
Received a
Which of the following were most import
Sound
Features
Quality
Brandname
What are your three favorite magazines?
1.
2.
What are your three favorite websites?
1.
2.
What features would you like to see add
RV-5 12/06
Customer Service
Tel 781-280-0300
Fax 781-280-0495 (Sales)
Fax 781-280-0499 (Service)
A Harman International Company
Product Shipments
900 Middlesex Bldg. #6
Billerica, MA 01821-0017
Part No. 070-18144 | Rev 0 | 12/06

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseNone
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2004:09:08 20:41:51Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.1
Modify Date                     : 2007:04:26 09:55:17+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2007:04:26 09:55:17+09:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : shazard
Title                           : RV5 Outside Front Cover.fm
Document ID                     : uuid:56d9c07d-3807-4580-8e93-ebc40e387db9
Instance ID                     : uuid:26be7c56-25d8-4e7c-9608-b56bffdf5b86
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 202
Author                          : shazard